Harvard University Press Fall 2010 Catalog

124
autumn / winter 2010

description

Harvard University Press New BooksHarvard University Press's Fall 2010 Announcement Catalog offers an introduction to our latest scholarship in Classics, Economics, Humanities, Law, Politics, Religion, Science, Social Science, as well as general interest titles and new paperbacks.

Transcript of Harvard University Press Fall 2010 Catalog

Page 1: Harvard University Press Fall 2010 Catalog

a u t u m n / w i n t e r

2 0 1 0

Page 2: Harvard University Press Fall 2010 Catalog

contents

GENERAL INTEREST ............1

ACADEMIC TRADE ............35

HUMANITIES ..................61

SOCIAL SCIENCE..............64

RELIGION & CLASSICS.......69

SCIENCE .......................73

ECONOMICS & LAW..........75

DISTRIBUTED BOOKS ........79

PAPERBACKS..................97

RECENTLY PUBLISHED .....116

AUTHOR/TITLE INDEX .....119

ORDER INFORMATION .....120

cover image:Queen of Sheba. Conrad Kyeser,Bellifortis, Bohemia, before 1405.Parchment. 140 fols., 320 x 240 mm.Göttingen, Niedersächsische Staats-und Universitätsbibliothek. Cod. philos.63, fol. 122r., Menil Foundation, Hickeyand Robertson.

inside front cover photo:“After the Ball” by Ramon Casas i Carbo(1866–1932). Museu de Montserrat,Abadia de Montserrat, Spain.The Bridgeman Art Library.

catalog design:sheila barrett-smith

Page 3: Harvard University Press Fall 2010 Catalog

Justice for HedgehogsRonald Dworkin

The fox knows many things, the Greeks said, but the hedgehog knows one big thing. In his mostcomprehensive work Ronald Dworkin argues that value in all its forms is one big thing: thatwhat truth is, life means, morality requires, and justice demands are different aspects of thesame large question. He develops original theories on a great variety of issues very rarely con-sidered in the same book: moral skepticism, literary, artistic, and historical interpretation, freewill, ancient moral theory, being good and living well, liberty, equality, and law among manyother topics. What we think about any one of these must stand up, eventually, to any argumentwe find compelling about the rest.

Skepticism in all its forms—philosophical, cyni-cal, or post-modern—threatens that unity. The Galileanrevolution once made the theological world of value safefor science. But the new republic gradually became a newempire: the modern philosophers inflated the methods ofphysics into a totalitarian theory of everything. Theyinvaded and occupied all the honorifics—reality, truth,fact, ground, meaning, knowledge, and being—and dic-

tated the terms on whichother bodies of thoughtmight aspire to them, andskepticism has been theinevitable result. We needa new revolution. We mustmake the world of sciencesafe for value.

BELKNAP PRESS | JANUARY | 6 1⁄8 X 9 1⁄4 | 506 PP. |ISBN 978-0-674-04671-9 | $35.00 (£24.95 UK) | PHILOSOPHY

w w w . h u p . h a r v a r d . e d u � h a r v a r d u n i v e r s i t y p r e s s 1

RONALD DWORK IN is

the 2007 Holberg Laureate.

He is Sommer Professor of

Law and Philosophy at New

York University and author

of many books, including Taking Rights

Seriously, A Matter of Principle, Law’s Empire,

Freedom’s Law, Sovereign Virtue, and Justice in

Robes (all from Harvard).� Author Appearances

� National Print Attention

� National RadioCampaign

� National Print andOnline Advertising:New York Times BookReview, New York Reviewof Books, The Atlantic,New Republic, TLS,London Review of Books,New York Times Online,New York Review ofBooks Online, TheNation Online,Economist Online,American ProspectOnline, National PublicRadio Online

� Online promotion

Page 4: Harvard University Press Fall 2010 Catalog

w w w . h u p . h a r v a r d . e d u � h a r v a r d u n i v e r s i t y p r e s s2

Peculiar InstitutionAmerica’s Death Penalty in an Age of Abolition

David Garland

“TELLS A FASCINATING AND IMPORTANT STORY THAT ILLUMINATES WHY THE DEATH

PENALTY IS SO PROBLEMATIC AND YET SO WELL SUITED TO AMERICAN PRACTICES.”

—AUSTIN SARAT, AUTHOR OF WHEN THE STATE KiLLS

America’s death penalty is a peculiar institution born and bred of political and cultural prac-tices. Despite its abolition elsewhere, it continues as a social fact enforced in U.S. law and indozens of American states. In a brilliantly provocative study, David Garland explains this tenac-

ity as the workings of a dynamic social system that acquired itscontemporary forms and meanings over time and that must beunderstood in terms of past and present functioning.

Once universal in every society, the political environ-ment of the death penalty has changed. America’s radical fed-eralism and local democracy, as well its legacy of violence andracism, account for our divergence from the rest of the West.Where elites of other nations were able to impose nationwideabolition despite public objections, American elites areunable—and unwilling—to end a decentralized punishment

that is embedded in popular culture.

In the course of hundreds of decisions, the federalcourts sought to rationalize and civilize an institution that hadtoo often resembled a “lynching,” producing layers of legalprocess, delays, and reversals. Yet, the Supreme Court insiststhat the issue is to be decided in the local political arena. Thus,the death penalty continues to respond to popular opinion,enhancing the power of criminal justice professionals, providingmedia drama, and pleasing a public audience that consumes itspractice. Garland brings a new clarity to our understanding ofthis peculiar institution—and a new challenge to supporters andopponents alike.

BELKNAP PRESS | OCTOBER | 6 1⁄8 X 9 1⁄4 | 3 FIGURES, 3 TABLES |410 PP. | ISBN 978-0-674-05723-4 | $35.00 / COBE | CURRENT AFFAIRS

DAV ID GARLAND is

Professor of Law and

Sociology at New York

University.

� National Print Attention

� National RadioCampaign

� National Print andOnline Advertising:New York Review ofBooks, The Atlantic,Harper’s, New Republic,The Nation, New YorkReview of Books Online,New Republic Online,London Review of BooksOnline, History NewsNetwork

� Online promotion

Page 5: Harvard University Press Fall 2010 Catalog

Human DignityGeorge Kateb

“THE LAST—THAT IS, THE FIRST AND ONLY—THOROUGHGOING EMERSONIAN IN

AMERICAN POLITICAL THOUGHT.”

—CORNEL WEST, PRINCETON UNIVERSITY

“TO READ KATEB IS TO ENCOUNTER A WRITER OF WIDE RESOURCES AND ENORMOUS

SUBTLETY, BUT ALSO THAT RARER THING: A THINKER.”

—DAVID BROMWICH, YALE UNIVERSITY

We often speak of the dignity owed to a person. And dignity is aword that regularly appears in political speeches. Charters are prom-ulgated in its name, and appeals to it are made when people all overthe world struggle to achieve their rights. But what exactly is dignity?When one person physically assaults another, we feel the wrongdemands immediate condemnation and legal sanction. Whereaswhen one person humiliates or thoughtlessly makes use of another,we recognize the wrong and hope for a remedy, but the socialresponse is less clear. The injury itself may be hard to quantify.

Given our concern with human dignity, it is odd that it hasreceived comparatively little scrutiny. Here, George Kateb asks what

human dignity is and why it mattersfor the claim to rights. He proposes that dignity is an “existen-tial” value that pertains to the identity of a person as a humanbeing. To injure or even to try to efface someone’s dignity is totreat that person as not human or less than human—as a thingor instrument or subhuman creature. Kateb does not limit thenotion of dignity to individuals but extends it to the humanspecies. The dignity of the human species rests on our unique-ness among all other species. In the book’s concluding section,he argues that despite the ravages we have inflicted on it,nature would be worse off without humanity. The supremelyfitting task of humanity can be seen as a “stewardship” ofnature. This secular defense of human dignity—the first book-length attempt of its kind—crowns the career of a distin-guished political thinker.

BELKNAP PRESS | JANUARY | 5 1⁄2 X 8 1⁄4 | 224 PP. |ISBN 978-0-674-04837-9 | $22.95 (£16.95 UK) | PHILOSOPHY

w w w . h u p . h a r v a r d . e d u � h a r v a r d u n i v e r s i t y p r e s s 3

GEORGE KATEB

is William Nelson

Cromwell

Professor of

Politics, Emeritus, Princeton University.

� National Print Attention

� National Print andOnline Advertising:New York Review ofBooks, The Atlantic, TLS,London Review of Books,Harper’s, New Republic,The Nation, New YorkReview of Books Online,American ProspectOnline

� Online promotion

Page 6: Harvard University Press Fall 2010 Catalog

w w w . h u p . h a r v a r d . e d u � h a r v a r d u n i v e r s i t y p r e s s4

DickinsonSelected Poems and Commentaries

Helen Vendler

“THE BEST CLOSE READER OF POEMS TO BE FOUND ON THE LITERARY PAGES.”

—SEAMUS HEANEY

Seamus Heaney, Denis Donoghue, William Pritchard, Marilyn Butler, Harold Bloom, and manyothers have praised Helen Vendler as one of the most attentive readers of poetry. Here, Vendlerturns her illuminating skills as a critic to 150 selected poems of Emily Dickinson. As she did inThe Art of Shakespeare’s Sonnets, she serves as an incomparable guide, considering both sty-listic and imaginative features of the poems.

In selecting these poems for commentary Vendler chooses toexhibit many aspects of Dickinson’s work as a poet, “from her first-personpoems to the poems of grand abstraction, from her ecstatic verses to herunparalleled depictions of emotional numbness, from her comic anecdotesto her painful poems of aftermath.” Included here are many expectedfavorites as well as more complex and less often anthologized poems.Taken together, Vendler’s selection reveals Emily Dickinson’s developmentas a poet, her astonishing range, and herrevelation of what Wordsworth called “thehistory and science of feeling.”

In accompanying commentariesVendler offers a deeper acquaintance withDickinson the writer, “the inventive con-

ceiver and linguistic shaper of her perennial themes.” All ofDickinson’s preoccupations—death, religion, love, the naturalworld, the nature of thought—are explored here in detail, butVendler always takes care to emphasize the poet’s startling imag-ination and the ingenuity of her linguistic invention. Whetherexploring less familiar poems or favorites we thought we knew,Vendler reveals Dickinson as “a master” of a revolutionary verse-language of immediacy and power. Dickinson: Selected Poemsand Commentaries will be an indispensable reference work forstudents of Dickinson and readers of lyric poetry.

BELKNAP PRESS | SEPTEMBER | 6 1⁄8 X 9 1⁄4 | 506 PP. |ISBN 978-0-674-04867-6 | $35.00 (£25.95 UK) | POETRY

HELEN

VENDLER is

A. Kingsley

Porter University Professor at Harvard

University and author of many books,

including The Art of Shakespeare’s

Sonnets (Harvard).� National Print Attention

� National RadioCampaign

� National Print andOnline Advertising:New York Times BookReview, New York Reviewof Books, The Atlantic,Harper’s, New Republic,TLS, London Review ofBooks, Poetry Magazine,Poetry Nation, New YorkTimes Online, New YorkReview of Books Online,The Nation Online, NewRepublic Online, LondonReview of Books Online,National Public RadioOnline

� Online promotion

Page 7: Harvard University Press Fall 2010 Catalog

The Naive and theSentimental NovelistOrhan Pamuk

What happens within us when we read a novel? And howdoes a novel create its unique effects, so distinct from thoseof a painting, a film, or a poem? In this inspired, thoughtful,deeply personal book, Orhan Pamuk takes us into the worldsof the writer and the reader, revealingtheir intimate connections.

Pamuk draws on FriedrichSchiller’s famous distinction between“naive” poets—who write sponta-neously, serenely, unselfconsciously—and “sentimental” poets: those who

are reflective, emotional, questioning, and alive to the artifice of the writ-ten word. Harking back to the beloved novels of his youth and rangingthrough the work of such writers as Tolstoy, Dostoevsky, Stendhal,Flaubert, Proust, Mann, and Naipaul, he explores the oscillation between

the naive and the reflective, and thesearch for an equilibrium, that lie at thecenter of the novelist’s craft. He pondersthe novel’s visual and sensual power—its ability to conjure landscapes so vividthey can make the here-and-now fadeaway. In the course of this exploration,he considers the elements of character,plot, time, and setting that compose the “sweet illusion” of thefictional world.

Anyone who has known the pleasure of becomingimmersed in a novel will enjoy, and learn from, this perceptivebook by one of the modern masters of the art.

THE CHARLES ELIOT NORTON LECTURES | NOVEMBER | 5 1⁄2 X 8 1⁄4 |234 PP. | ISBN 978-0-674-05076-1 | $22.95 / COBE | LITERATURE

Photo by Spencer Platt

w w w . h u p . h a r v a r d . e d u � h a r v a r d u n i v e r s i t y p r e s s 5

ORHAN

PAMUK , the

Turkish

novelist, is

author of

Snow, My

Name Is Red, Istanbul, The Museum

of Innocence, and other works. He

was awarded the 2006 Nobel Prize

in Literature. More information on

the author can be found at

www.orhanpamuk.net.

� National Print Attention

� National Print andOnline Advertising:New York Times BookReview, New York Reviewof Books, The Atlantic,TLS, Bookforum, BostonReview, New York TimesOnline, New York Reviewof Books Online, LondonReview of Books Online,New Republic Online,The Nation Online,Harper’s Online,American ProspectOnline, PopMatters.com,National Public RadioOnline

� Online promotion

Page 8: Harvard University Press Fall 2010 Catalog

w w w . h u p . h a r v a r d . e d u � h a r v a r d u n i v e r s i t y p r e s s6

Pride and PrejudiceAn Annotated Edition

Jane AustenEdited by Patricia Meyer Spacks

“READING AUSTEN’S MASTERPIECE WITH PATRICIA MEYER SPACKS’SCOMMENTARIES AT HAND IS LIKE READING IT WITH A BETTER, WISER FRIEND:SOMEONE WHO IS ABLE TO ANTICIPATE OUR QUESTIONS AND REACTIONS AND

SOMEONE WHO ALSO KNOWS AUSTEN AND HER PEOPLE INTIMATELY.”

—DEIDRE LYNCH, UNIVERSITY OF TORONTO

Along with the plays of William Shakespeare and the works ofCharles Dickens, Jane Austen’s novels are among the most belovedbooks of Western literature. Pride and Prejudice (1813) was inAusten’s lifetime her most popular novel, and it was the author’spersonal favorite. Adapted many times to the screen and stage, andthe inspiration for numerous imitations, it remains today her mostwidely read book. Now, in this beautifully illustrated and anno-tated edition, distinguished scholar Patricia Meyer Spacks instructsthe reader in a larger appreciation of the novel’s enduring pleasuresand provides analysis of Darcy, Elizabeth Bennet, Lady Catherine,and all the characters who inhabitthe world of Pride and Prejudice.

This edition will be treasured by specialists and first-time readers, and especially by devoted Austen fans who thinkof themselves as Friends of Jane. In her Introduction, Spacksconsiders Austen’s life and career, the continuing appeal of Prideand Prejudice, and its power as a stimulus for fantasy (MaureenDowd, writing in The New York Times, can hold forth at lengthon Obama as a Darcy-figure, knowing full well her readers will“understand that she wished to suggest glamour and sexiness”).Her Introduction also explores the value and art of literary anno-tation. In her running commentary on the novel, she providesnotes on literary and historical contexts, allusions, and languagelikely to cause difficulty to modern readers. She offers interpre-tation and analysis, always with the wisdom, humor, and lighttouch of an experienced and sensitive teacher.

BELKNAP PRESS | OCTOBER | 9 X 9 1⁄2 | 74 COLOR ILLUS. | 424 PP. |ISBN 978-0-674-04916-1 | $35.00 (£24.95 UK) | LITERATURE

PATR IC IA

MEYER

SPACKS

is Edgar F. Shannon Professor of

English, Emerita, at the

University of Virginia.

� National Print Attention

� National Print andOnline Advertising:New York Review ofBooks, The Atlantic, TLS,London Review of Books,Harper’s, New YorkReview of Books Online,The Atlantic Online,London Review of BooksOnline, New RepublicOnline, JASNA News,National Public RadioOnline

� Online promotion

Promenade dress, fashion platefrom Rudolph Ackermann,Re p o s i t o r y o f A r t s , publishedbetween 1809 and 1829. TheStapleton Collection / TheBridgeman Art Library.

Page 9: Harvard University Press Fall 2010 Catalog

The Last UtopiaHuman Rights in History

Samuel Moyn

“A MOST WELCOME BOOK, THE LAST UTOPiA IS A CLEAR-EYED ACCOUNT OF THE

ORIGINS OF ‘HUMAN RIGHTS’: THE BEST WE HAVE.”

—TONY JUDT

Human rights offer a vision of international justice that today’s idealistic millions hold dear. Yetthe very concept on which the movement is based became familiaronly a few decades ago when it profoundly reshaped our hopes for animproved humanity. In this pioneering book, Samuel Moyn elevatesthat extraordinary transformation to center stage and asks what itreveals about the ideal’s troubled present and uncertain future.

For some, human rights stretch back to the dawn of West-ern civilization, the age of the American and French Revolutions, orthe post–World War II moment when the Universal Declaration ofHuman Rights was framed. Revisiting these episodes in a dramatictour of humanity’s moral history, The Last Utopia shows that it wasin the decade after 1968 that human rights began to make sense tobroad communities of people as the proper cause of justice. Across

eastern and western Europe, as well as throughout the UnitedStates and Latin America, human rights crystallized in a fewshort years as social activism and political rhetoric moved itfrom the hallways of the United Nations to the global forefront.

It was on the ruins of earlier political utopias, Moynargues, that human rights achieved contemporary prominence.The morality of individual rights substituted for the soiled polit-ical dreams of revolutionary communism and nationalism asinternational law became an alternative to popular struggle andbloody violence. But as the ideal of human rights enters intorival political agendas, it requires more vigilance and scrutinythan when it became the watchword of our hopes.

BELKNAP PRESS | SEPTEMBER | 5 1⁄2 X 8 1⁄4 | 1 LINE ILLUS. | 305 PP. |ISBN 978-0-674-04872-0 | $27.95 (£20.95 UK) | HISTORY

w w w . h u p . h a r v a r d . e d u � h a r v a r d u n i v e r s i t y p r e s s 7

SAMUEL MOYN

is Professor of

History at

Columbia

University.

� National Print Attention

� National RadioCampaign

� National Print andOnline Advertising:New York Review ofBooks, The Atlantic, TLS,London Review of Books,Harper’s, Bookforum,New York Review ofBooks Online, LondonReview of Books Online,New Republic Online,The Nation Online,History News Network

� Online promotion

Page 10: Harvard University Press Fall 2010 Catalog

w w w . h u p . h a r v a r d . e d u � h a r v a r d u n i v e r s i t y p r e s s8

What Is a PalestinianStateWorth?Sari Nusseibeh

PRAISE FOR ONcE UPON A cOUNTRY: A PALESTiNiAN LiFE:

“NUSSEIBEH’S AUTOBIOGRAPHY IS, PERHAPS, THE MOST IMPORTANT TO EMERGE

FROM THE MIDDLE EAST FOR DECADES.”

—MORIS FARHI, THE iNdEPENdENT

“A DEEPLY ADMIRABLE BOOK BY A DEEPLY ADMIRABLE MAN.”

—LEON WIESELTIER, NEW YORK TiMES BOOK REviEW

Can a devout Jew be a devout Jew and drop the belief in the rebuild-ing of the Temple? Can a devout Muslim be a devout Muslim and dropthe belief in the sacredness of the Rock? Can one right (the right ofreturn) be given up for another (the right to live in peace)? Can oneclaim Palestinian identity and still retain Israeli citizenship? What is aPalestinian state worth? For over sixty years, the Israeli-Palestinian con-flict has been subjected to many solutions and offered many answers bydiverse parties. Yet, answers are only asgood as the questions that beget them.It is with this simple, but powerful idea,the idea of asking the basic questionsanew, that the renowned Palestinian

philosopher and activist Sari Nusseibeh begins his book.

What Is a Palestinian State Worth? poses questionsabout the history, meaning, future, and resolution of theIsrael/Palestine conflict. Deeply informed by political philoso-phy and based on decades of personal involvement with politicsand social activism, Nusseibeh’s moderate voice—global in itsoutlook, yet truly grounded in his native city of Jerusalem—points us toward a future which, as George Lamming once putit, is colonized by our acts in this moment, but which mustalways remain open.

FEBRUARY | 5 1⁄2 X 8 1⁄4 | 234 PP. | ISBN 978-0-674-04873-7 |$19.95 (£14.95 UK) | CURRENT AFFAIRS

SAR I

NUSSE IBEH is

the president of

Al-Quds University in Jerusalem

and the author of Once Upon a

Country: A Palestinian Life.

� National Print Attention

� National RadioCampaign

� National Print andOnline Advertising:New York Review ofBooks, The Atlantic, TLS,London Review of Books,New Republic, TheNation, Foreign Affairs,New York Review ofBooks Online, HistoryNews Network

� Online promotion

Page 11: Harvard University Press Fall 2010 Catalog

Roosevelt’s PurgeHow FDR Fought to Change the Democratic Party

Susan Dunn

In his first term in office, Franklin Roosevelt helped pull the nation out of the Great Depressionwith his landmark programs. In November 1936, every state except Maine and Vermont votedenthusiastically for his reelection. But then the political winds shifted. Not only did the SupremeCourt block some of his transformational experiments, but he also faced serious oppositionwithin his own party. Conservative Democrats such as Senators Walter George of Georgia andMillard Tydings of Maryland allied themselves with Republicansto vote down New Deal bills.

Susan Dunn tells the dramatic story of FDR’s unprece-dented battle to drive his foes out of his party by intervening inDemocratic primaries and backing liberal challengers to conser-vative incumbents. Reporters branded his tactic a “purge”—andthe inflammatory label stuck. Roosevelt spent the summer monthsof 1938 campaigning across the country, defending his progressivepolicies and lashing out at conservatives. Despite his efforts, theDemocrats took a beating in the midterm elections.

The purge stemmednot only from FDR’s commit-ment to the New Deal but also from his conviction that thenation needed two responsible political parties, one liberal, theother conservative. Although the purge failed, at great politicalcost to the president, it heralded the realignment of politicalparties that would take place in the 1960s, 1970s, and 1980s.By the end of the century, the irreconcilable tensions withinthe Democratic Party had exploded, and the once solidly Dem-ocratic South was solid no more. It had taken sixty years toresolve the tangled problems to which FDR devoted one fran-tic, memorable summer.

BELKNAP PRESS | OCTOBER | 5 1⁄2 X 8 1⁄4 | 20 HALFTONES | 354 PP. |ISBN 978-0-674-05717-3 | $27.95 (£20.95 UK) | HISTORY

w w w . h u p . h a r v a r d . e d u � h a r v a r d u n i v e r s i t y p r e s s 9

SUSAN DUNN is

Preston Parish ’41

Third Century

Professor in the Arts

and Humanities at

Williams College.

� National Print Attention

� National RadioCampaign

� National Print andOnline Advertising:New York Review ofBooks, The Atlantic,Harper’s, TLS, LondonReview of Books, TheAtlantic Online, NewRepublic Online, NewYork Review of BooksOnline, AmericanProspect Online, Liberaland conservative blognetwork, History NewsNetwork

� Online promotion

Page 12: Harvard University Press Fall 2010 Catalog

w w w . h u p . h a r v a r d . e d u � h a r v a r d u n i v e r s i t y p r e s s1 0

The Berlin-Baghdad ExpressThe Ottoman Empire and Germany’s Bid for World Power

Sean McMeekin

The modern Middle East was forged in the crucible of the First World War, but few know thefull story of how war actually came to the region. As Sean McMeekin reveals in this startlingreinterpretation of the war, it was neither the British nor the French but rather a small cliqueof Germans and Turks who thrust the Islamic world into the conflict for their own political, eco-nomic, and military ends.

The Berlin-Baghdad Express tells the fascinating story of how Germany exploitedOttoman pan-Islamism in order to destroy the British Empire, then the largest Islamic power inthe world. Meanwhile the Young Turks harnessed themselves to German military might to

avenge Turkey’s hereditary enemy, Russia. Told from the perspec-tive of the key decision-makers on the Turco-German side, manyof the most consequential events of World War I—Turkey’s entryinto the war, Gallipoli, the Armenian massacres, the Arab revolt,and the Russian Revolution—are illuminated as never before.

Drawing on a wealth of new sources, McMeekin forcesus to re-examine Western interference in the Middle East and itslamentable results. It is an epic tragicomedy of unintended conse-quences, as Turkish nationalists give Russia the war it desperatelywants, jihad begets an Islamicinsurrection in Mecca, Germansabotage plots upend the Tsar

delivering Turkey from Russia’s yoke, and German Zionism mid-wifes the Balfour Declaration. All along, the story is interwovenwith the drama surrounding German efforts to complete theBerlin to Baghdad railway, the weapon designed to win the warand assure German hegemony over the Middle East.

BELKNAP PRESS | SEPTEMBER | 6 1⁄8 X 9 1⁄4 | 454 PP. |ISBN 978-0-674-05739-5 | $29.95 / USA | HISTORY

SEAN MCMEEK IN

is Assistant

Professor of

International Relations at Bilkent

University in Turkey.

� National Print Attention

� National Print andOnline Advertising:New York Review ofBooks, London Review ofBooks, New York Reviewof Books Online, ForeignAffairs Online, HistoryNews Network

� Online promotion

Page 13: Harvard University Press Fall 2010 Catalog

The Decline and Fall of theAmerican RepublicBruce Ackerman

Bruce Ackerman shows how the institutional dynamics of the last half-century have trans-formed the American presidency into a potential platform for political extremism and law-lessness. Watergate, Iran-Contra, and the War on Terror are only symptoms of deeperpathologies. Ackerman points to a series of developments that have previously been treatedindependently of one another—from the rise of presidential pri-maries, to the role of pollsters and media gurus, to the central-ization of power in White House czars, to the politicization of themilitary, to the manipulation of constitutional doctrine to justifypresidential power-grabs. He shows how these different transfor-mations can interact to generate profound constitutional crises inthe twenty-first century—and then proposes a series of reformsthat will minimize, if not eliminate, the risks going forward.

The book aims to begin a new constitutional debate.Americans should not suppose that Barack Obama’s centrism andconstitutionalism will typify the presidencies of the twenty-firstcentury. We should seize the present opportunity to confront

deeper institutional pathologiesbefore it is too late.

BELKNAP PRESS | THE TANNERLECTURES ON HUMANVALUES |OCTOBER | 5 1⁄2 X 8 1⁄4 | 264 PP. |ISBN 978-0-674-05703-6 |$25.95 (£19.95 UK) | CURRENT AFFAIRS

w w w . h u p . h a r v a r d . e d u � h a r v a r d u n i v e r s i t y p r e s s 1 1

BRUCE

ACKERMAN is

Sterling

Professor of

Law and

Political

Science at Yale University and the author

of We the People and The Failure of the

Founding Fathers (both from Harvard).

� Author Appearances

� National Print Attention

� National RadioCampaign

� National Print andOnline Advertising:New York Review ofBooks, The Atlantic, NewRepublic, London Reviewof Books, Harper’s, NewRepublic, The Nation,New York Review ofBooks Online, NewRepublic Online,American ProspectOnline, Weekly StandardOnline, History NewsNetwork,dailyBeast.com

� Online promotion

Page 14: Harvard University Press Fall 2010 Catalog

w w w . h u p . h a r v a r d . e d u � h a r v a r d u n i v e r s i t y p r e s s1 2

Age of FractureDaniel T. Rodgers

“THE MOST WIDE-RANGING AND AMBITIOUS INTERPRETATION OF LATE-TWENTIETH-CENTURY AMERICAN INTELLECTUAL HISTORY AVAILABLE.”

—JAMES KLOPPENBERG

In the last quarter of the twentieth century, the ideas that most Americans lived by started tofragment. Mid-century concepts of national consensus, managed markets, gender and racialidentities, citizen obligation, and historical memory became more fluid. Flexible markets pushedaside Keynesian macroeconomic structures. Racial and gender solidarity divided into multipleidentities; community responsibility shrank to smaller circles. In this wide-ranging narrative,

Daniel Rodgers shows how the collective purposes andmeanings that had framed social debate became unhingedand uncertain.

Age of Fracture offers a powerful reinterpretationof the ways in which the decades surrounding the 1980schanged America. Through a contagion of visions andmetaphors, on both the intellectual right and the intellec-tual left, earlier notions of history and society that stressedsolidity, collective institutions, and social circumstancesgave way to a more individualized human nature thatemphasized choice, agency,performance, and desire.

On a broad canvas that includes Michel Foucault, Ronald Rea-gan, Judith Butler, Charles Murray, Jeffrey Sachs, and manymore, Rodgers explains how structures of power came to seemless important than market choice and fluid selves.

Cutting across the social and political arenas of late-twentieth-century life and thought, from economic theory andthe culture wars to disputes over poverty, color-blindness, andsisterhood, Rodgers reveals how our categories of social realityhave been fractured and destabilized. As we survey the intel-lectual wreckage of this war of ideas, we better understand theemergence of our present age of uncertainty.

BELKNAP PRESS | JANUARY | 6 1⁄8 X 9 1⁄4 | 346 PP. |ISBN 978-0-674-05744-9 | $29.95 (£22.95 UK) | CURRENT AFFAIRS

DAN IEL T. RODGERS

is Henry Charles Lea

Professor of History at

Princeton University and

the author of Atlantic Crossings (Harvard).

� National Print Attention

� National Print andOnline Advertising:New York Review ofBooks, The Atlantic, NewRepublic, TLS, LondonReview of Books,Harper’s, New Republic,New York Review ofBooks Online, NewRepublic Online, TheNation Online, AmericanProspect Online, ForeignAffairs Online, HistoryNews Network

� Online promotion

Page 15: Harvard University Press Fall 2010 Catalog

The Classical TraditionEdited by Anthony Grafton, GlennW. Most,and Salvatore SettisAdvisory Board: Gordon Braden, Peter Burke, Joseph Connors, Jas Elsner,Philip Gossett, Dimitri Gutas, Alexander Jones, Jill Kraye, Wilfried Nippel,Vivian Nutton, Claudia Rapp, and Jean-Claude Schmitt

How do we get from the polis to the police? Or from Odysseus’ sirensto an ambulance’s? The legacy of ancient Greece and Rome hasbeen imitated, resisted, misunderstood, and reworked by every cul-ture that followed. In this volume, some five hundred articles by a

wide range of scholars investigate the afterlife of this rich heritage in thefields of literature, philosophy, art, architecture, history, politics, religion,and science. Arranged alphabetically from Academy to Zoology, theessays—designed and written to serve scholars, students,and the general reader alike—show how the Classicaltradition has shaped human endeavors from art to gov-

ernment, mathematics to medicine, drama to urban plan-ning, legal theory to popular culture. At once authoritative and accessible,learned and entertaining, comprehensive and surprising, and accompanied byan extensive selection of illustrations, this guide illuminates the vitality of theClassical tradition that still surrounds us today.

BELKNAP PRESS | HARVARD UNIVERSITY PRESSREFERENCE LIBRARY |OCTOBER | 8 X10 1⁄4 | 150 COLOR ILLUS. |1028 PP. | ISBN 978-0-674-03572-0 |$49.95 (£36.95 UK) | CLASSICS

1 3

ANTHONY GRAFTON is Henry Putnam

University Professor of History and Chair

of the Council of the Humanities at

Princeton University. He is the author of

many books, including Worlds Made by

Words (Harvard) and “I have always loved

the Holy Tongue” (page 25). GLENN W.

MOST is Professor of Greek Philology,

Scuola Normale Superiore di Pisa, and

Professor of Social Thought, University of

Chicago. He is the author of Doubting

Thomas (Harvard). SALVATORE SET T I S

is Director of the Scuola Normale

Superiore di Pisa and Professor of the

History of Classical Art and Archaeology.

� National Print Attention

� National Print andOnline Advertising:New York Review ofBooks, The Atlantic, TLS,London Review of Books,Harper’s, Bookforum,New Republic, New YorkReview of Books Online,The Atlantic Online,London Review of BooksOnline, New RepublicOnline, National PublicRadio Online

w w w . h u p . h a r v a r d . e d u � h a r v a r d u n i v e r s i t y p r e s s

Page 16: Harvard University Press Fall 2010 Catalog

w w w . h u p . h a r v a r d . e d u � h a r v a r d u n i v e r s i t y p r e s s1 4

Shi’ismA Religion of Protest

Hamid Dabashi

For a Western world anxious to understand Islam and, in particular, Shi’ism, this book arriveswith urgently needed information and critical analysis. Hamid Dabashi exposes the soul ofShi’ism as a religion of protest—successful only when in a warring position, and losing its legit-imacy when in power.

Dabashi makes his case through a detailed discussion of the Shi’i doctrinal founda-tions, a panoramic view of its historical unfolding, a varied investigation into its visual and per-

forming arts, and finally a focus on the three major sites of itscontemporary contestations: Iran, Iraq, and Lebanon. In these states,Shi’ism seems to have ceased to be a sect within the larger context ofIslam and has instead emerged to claim global political attention. Herewe see Shi’ism in its combative mode—reminiscent of its traumaticbirth in early Islamic history. Hezbollah in Lebanon claims Shi’ism, asdo the militant insurgents in Iraq, the ruling Ayatollahs in Iran, andthe masses of youthful demonstrators rebelling against their reign. Alldeclare their active loyalties to a religion of protest that has definedthem and their ancestry for almostfourteen hundred years.

Shi’sm: A Religion of Protestattends to the explosive conflicts inthe Middle East with an abiding atten-tion to historical facts, cultural forces,religious convictions, literary andartistic nuances, and metaphysicaldetails. This timely book offers read-ers a bravely intelligent history of aworld religion.

BELKNAP PRESS | JANUARY | 6 1⁄8 X 9 1⁄4 | 13 HALFTONES, 1 MAP |390 PP. | ISBN 978-0-674-04945-1 | $29.95 (£22.95 UK) |RELIGION/HISTORY

HAMID

DABASH I , an

internationally

renowned

cultural critic and award-winning

author, is Hagop Kevorkian Professor

of Iranian Studies and Comparative

Literature at Columbia University.

More information can be found at

www.hamiddabashi.com.

� National Print Attention

� National RadioCampaign

� National Print andOnline Advertising:New York Review ofBooks, The Atlantic, TLS,London Review of Books,New Republic, New YorkReview of Books Online,Foreign Affairs Online,London Review of BooksOnline, History NewsNetwork

Page 17: Harvard University Press Fall 2010 Catalog

In Praise of CopyingMarcus Boon

This book is devoted to a deceptively simple but original argument: that copying is an essentialpart of being human, that the ability to copy is worthy of celebration, and that, without recog-nizing how integral copying is to being human, we cannot understand ourselves or the worldwe live in.

In spite of the laws, stigmas, and anxieties attached to it, the word “copying” perme-ates contemporary culture, shaping discourse on issues from hip hop to digitization to genderreassignment, and is particularly crucial in legal debates concerningintellectual property and copyright. Yet as a philosophical concept,copying remains poorly understood. Working comparatively acrosscultures and times, Marcus Boon undertakes an examination ofwhat this word means—historically, culturally, philosophically—and why it fills us with fear and fascination. He argues that the dom-inant legal-political structures that define copying today obscuremuch broader processes of imitation that have constituted humancommunities for ages and continue to shape various subculturestoday. Drawing on contemporary art, music and film, the history of

aesthetics, critical theory, and Bud-dhist philosophy and practice, InPraise of Copying seeks to showhow and why copying works, whatthe sources of its power are, andthe political stakes of renegotiatingthe way we value copying in theage of globalization.

OCTOBER | 5 1⁄2 X 8 1⁄4 | 240 PP. | ISBN 978-0-674-04783-9 |$25.95 (£19.95 UK) | CULTURAL STUDIES

w w w . h u p . h a r v a r d . e d u � h a r v a r d u n i v e r s i t y p r e s s 1 5

MARCUS BOON

is Associate

Professor of

English, York

University,

Toronto, and the

author of The Road of Excess

(Harvard). More information can be

found at www.marcusboon.com.

� National Print Attention

� National Print andOnline Advertising:New York Review ofBooks, Harper’s, TLS,London Review of Books,Bookforum, New YorkReview of Books Online,The Atlantic Online,New Republic Online,The Nation Online,History News Network

� Online promotion

Page 18: Harvard University Press Fall 2010 Catalog

w w w . h u p . h a r v a r d . e d u � h a r v a r d u n i v e r s i t y p r e s s1 6

The End of ArroganceAmerica in the Global Competition of Ideas

StevenWeber and Bruce W. Jentleson

Free-market capitalism, hegemony, Western culture, peace, and democracy—the ideas thatshaped world politics in the twentieth century and underpinned American foreign policy—have lost a good deal of their strength. Authority is now more contested and power more dif-fuse. Hegemony (benign or otherwise) is no longer a choice, not for the United States, for China,or for anyone else.

Steven Weber and Bruce Jentleson are not declinists, but they argue that the UnitedStates must take a different stance toward the rest of the world in this, the twenty-first century.

Now that we can’t dominate others, we must rely on strategy,making trade-offs and focusing our efforts. And they do notmean military strategy, such as “the global war on terror.”Rather, we must compete in the global marketplace of ideas—with state-directed capitalism, with charismatic authoritarianleaders, with jihadism. In politics, ideas and influence are nowcritical currency.

At the core of our efforts must be a new conceptionof the world order based on mutuality, and of a just societythat inspires and embraces people around the world.

SEPTEMBER | 5 X 7 3⁄4 | 200 PP. | ISBN 978-0-674-05818-7 |$22.95 (£16.95 UK) | CURRENT AFFAIRS

STEVEN WEBER

is Professor of Political

Science, University of

California, Berkeley, and

author of The Success of Open Source (Harvard).

BRUCE W. JENTLESON is Professor of Public

Policy and Political Science, Duke University.

� National Print Attention

� National Print andOnline Advertising:New York Review ofBooks, The Nation, NewRepublic, New YorkReview of Books Online,Foreign Affairs Online,The Huffington Post

Page 19: Harvard University Press Fall 2010 Catalog

Wandering SoulThe Dybbuk’s Creator, S. An-sky

Gabriella Safran

The man who would become S. An-sky—ethnographer, war correspondent, author of the best-known Yiddish play, The Dybbuk—was born Shloyme-Zanvl Rappoport in 1863, in Russia’sPale of Settlement. His journey from the streets of Vitebsk to the center of modern Yiddish andHebrew theater, by way of St. Petersburg, Paris, and war-torn Austria-Hungry, was both extraor-dinary and in some ways typical: Marc Chagall, another child of Vitebsk, would make a similartransit a generation later. Like Chagall, An-sky was loyal to mul-tiple, conflicting Jewish, Russian, and European identities. Andlike Chagall, An-sky made his physical and cultural transiencemanifest as he drew on Jewish folk culture to create art thatdefied nationality.

Leaving Vitebsk at seventeen, An-sky forged a numberof apparently contradictory paths. A witness to peasant poverty,pogroms, and war, he tried to rescue the vestiges of disappearingcommunities even while fighting for reform. A loner addicted toreinventing himself—at times a Russian laborer, a radical orator,a Jewish activist, an ethnographer of Hasidism, a wartime reliefworker—An-sky saw himself as a savior of the people’s cultureand its artifacts. What united the disparate strands of his life was his eagerness to speak to andfor as many people as possible, regardless of their language or national origin.

In this first full-length biography in English, Gabriella Safran, using Russian, Yiddish,Hebrew, and French sources, recreates this neglected protean figure who, with his passions,

struggles, and art, anticipated the complicated identities of theEuropean Jews who would follow him.

NOVEMBER | 6 1⁄8 X 9 1⁄4 | 26 HALFTONES, 1 MAP | 410 PP. |ISBN 978-0-674-05570-4 | $29.95 (£22.95 UK) | BIOGRAPHY

w w w . h u p . h a r v a r d . e d u � h a r v a r d u n i v e r s i t y p r e s s 1 7

GABR IELLA

SAFRAN is Associate

Professor of Slavic

Languages and

Literatures at

Stanford University.

� National Print Attention

� National Print andOnline Advertising:New York Review ofBooks, The Atlantic,Harper’s, New Republic,Bookslut Online, JewishWeek Online

� Online promotion

Page 20: Harvard University Press Fall 2010 Catalog

VOLUME 1F R O M T H E P H A R AO H S TO

T H E FA L L O F T H E R O MA N

E M P I R E , N E W E D I T I O N

VOLUME 2F R O M T H E E A R LY

C H R I S T I A N E R A TO T H E

“AG E O F D I S CO V E RY ”

PART 1: FROM THE DEMONIC THREATTO THE INCARNATION OFSAINTHOOD, NEW EDITION

PART 2: AFRICANS IN THE CHRISTIANORDINANCE OF THE WORLD,NEW EDITION

VOLUME 3FROM THE “AGE OF DISCOVERY”

TO THE AGE OF ABOLITION

PART 1 : ARTISTS OF THERENAISSANCE AND BAROQUE

1 8 w w w . h u p . h a r v a r d . e d u � h a r v a r d u n i v e r s i t y p r e s s

“THE IMAGES ARE SIMPLY

EXTRAORDINARY AND THE SCHOLARSHIP

INSPIRING. ANYONE WHO CARES ABOUT

WESTERN ART OR ABOUT AFRICA AND

HER DIASPORA OUGHT TO KNOW THESE

MAGNIFICENT VOLUMES.”

—KWAME ANTHONY APPIAH

the

Image of

the Black in

Western ArtEDITED BY

DAVID BINDMAN &

HENRY LOUIS GATES, JR.

Page 21: Harvard University Press Fall 2010 Catalog

In the 1960s, as a response to segregation in the United States, the influ-ential art patron Dominique de Menil began a research project and photoarchive called The Image of the Black in Western Art. Now, fifty yearslater, as the first American president of African American descent occu-pies his historic term in office, her mission has been re-invigoratedthrough the collaboration of Harvard University Press and the W. E. B.Du Bois Institute to present new editions of the coveted five original

books and the anticipated firstpart of a new volume. Thecompleted set will include tensumptuous books in five vol-umes with up-to-date intro-ductions and more full-colorillustrations, printed on high-quality art stock for books that will last a lifetime.

This monumental publication offers expert commentary and alavishly illustrated history of the representations of people of Africandescent ranging from the ancient images of Pharaohs created by unknownhands to the works of the great European masters such as Bosch, Rem-brandt, Rubens, and Hogarth to stunning new creations by contempo-rary black artists. Including thousands of beautiful, moving, and oftenlittle-known images of black people, including queens and slaves, saintsand soldiers, children and gods, The Image of the Black in Western Artprovides a treasury of masterpieces from four millennia—a testament to

the black experience in the West and a tribute to art’s endur-ing power to shape our common humanity.

FROMTHE PHARAOHS TO THE FALL OF THE ROMAN EMPIREBELKNAP PRESS | NOVEMBER | 9 3⁄4 X 11 | 345 COLOR ILLUS.,50 HALFTONES, 5 MAPS | 340 PP. | ISBN 978-0-674-05271-0 |$95.00 (£69.95 UK) | ART

FROMTHE DEMONIC THREAT TO THE INCARNATION OF SAINTHOODBELKNAP PRESS | NOVEMBER | 9 3⁄4 X 11 |168 COLOR ILLUS., 15 HALFTONES, 2 MAPS | 260 PP. |ISBN 978-0-674-05256-7 | $95.00 (£69.95 UK) | ART

AFRICANS IN THE CHRISTIAN ORDINANCE OF THEWORLDBELKNAP PRESS | NOVEMBER | 9 3⁄4 X 11 | 259 COLOR ILLUS.,20 HALFTONES | 310 PP. | ISBN 978-0-674-05258-1 |$95.00 (£69.95 UK) | ART

ARTISTS OF THE RENAISSANCE AND BAROQUEBELKNAP PRESS | NOVEMBER | 9 3⁄4 X 11 | 190 COLOR ILLUS. |290 PP. | ISBN 978-0-674-05261-1 | $95.00 (£69.95 UK) | ART

Statuette of a young musician. From Chalon-sur-Saône. Hellenist icPeriod. Bronze. H: 20.2 cm. Paris, Bibl iothèque Nationale, Cabinet desMédail les. Babelon and Blanchet, Catalogue des bronzes (Paris, 1895),no. 1009. Statue of St. Maurice. About 1240-50. Sandstone (traces ofpolychromy). H: 112 cm. Magdeburg, Cathedral of St. Maurice and St.Catherine, choir. Menil Foundation, Hickey and Robertson.

� National Print Attention

� National Print and OnlineAdvertising: New YorkTimes Book Review, NewYork Review of Books, TheAtlantic, TLS, Bookforum,Boston Review, LondonReview of Books,Artforum, Art in America,New York Times Online,New York Review of BooksOnline, TheRoot.com,London Review of BooksOnline, New RepublicOnline, National PublicRadio Online

� Online promotion

DAV ID B INDMAN is Emeritus

Professor of the History of Art at

University College London.

HENRY LOU IS GATES , JR . , is

Alphonse Fletcher University

Professor and is the Director of the

W. E. B. Du Bois Institute for African

and African American Research at

Harvard University.

1 9w w w . h u p . h a r v a r d . e d u � h a r v a r d u n i v e r s i t y p r e s s

Page 22: Harvard University Press Fall 2010 Catalog

2 0

The 50 Most Extreme Places inOur Solar SystemDavid Baker and Todd Ratcliff

“THIS IS A COOL BOOK. SPECTACULARLY ILLUSTRATED, IT CONVEYS SOME OF

ASTRONOMY’S HEAVIEST FACTS IN A LIGHT AND AIRY WAY. READERS SHOULD

HAVE FUN READING IT.”

—PAUL W. HODGE, UNIVERSITY OF WASHINGTON

The extreme events that we hear about daily—hurricanes, earthquakes, tsunamis, and vol-canic eruptions—are extreme in purely human terms, in the devastation they do. But this

book moves our understanding of the extreme into extraterrestrialdimensions and gives us an awe-inspiring sense of what our solar sys-tem at its utmost can do. Martian dust devils taller than Mount Ever-est. A hurricane that lasts over 340 years. Volcanoes with “lava” colderthan Antarctica. Hail made of diamonds. Here, as the authors say, the“WOW” factor is restored to our understanding of scientific discovery,as we witness the grandeur and the weirdness that inspire researchersto dig deeper and go ever farther into the mysteries of the universe.

The 50 Most Extreme Places in Our Solar System combinesa fascination with natural disasters and the mesmerizing allure of outerspace to take readers on a journey that will forever change the waythey view our solar system. Full of dazzling photographs from NASA’smost recent observations, this bookexplores extreme regions on Earth and

beyond—giant turbulent storms, explosive volcanoes, and thepossibility of life surviving in harsh conditions.

More than a collection of facts, the book conveys thedynamism of science as a process of exploration and discovery.As they amuse and entertain, David Baker and Todd Ratcliff,two experts in planetary science, highlight recent developmentsand unresolved mysteries and strive, at every turn, to answerthat important scientific question: “Why?”

BELKNAP PRESS | SEPTEMBER | 7 X 8 |225 COLOR ILLUS., 25 HALFTONES | 276 PP. | ISBN 978-0-674-04998-7 |$27.95 (£19.95 UK) | SCIENCE

Photo by Lois Jean Wardell , Ph.D.

DAV ID

BAKER

is the

Chairman of the Physics Department at

Austin College. TODD RATCL I FF is a

planetary geophysicist at NASA’s Jet

Propulsion Laboratory.

� National Print Attention

� National Print andOnline Advertising:Harper’s Online, Sky andTelescope Online,Astronomy MagazineOnline, Science Online,Nature Online, SeedMagazine Online

� Online promotion

w w w . h u p . h a r v a r d . e d u � h a r v a r d u n i v e r s i t y p r e s s

Page 23: Harvard University Press Fall 2010 Catalog

Poetry and the PoliceCommunication Networks in Eighteenth-Century Paris

Robert Darnton

In spring 1749, François Bonis, a medical student in Paris, found himself unexpectedly hauledoff to the Bastille for distributing an “abominable poem about the king.” So began the Affair ofthe Fourteen, a police crackdown on ordinary citizens for unau-thorized poetry recitals. Why was the official response to thesepoems so intense?

In this captivating book, Robert Darnton follows thepoems as they passed through several media: copied on scraps ofpaper, dictated from one person to another, memorized anddeclaimed to an audience. But the most effective dispersal occurredthrough music, when poems were sung to familiar tunes. Lyricsoften referred to current events or revealed popular attitudestoward the royal court. The songs provided a running commentaryon public affairs, and Darnton brilliantly traces how the lyrics fitinto song cycles that carried messages through the streets of Parisduring a period of rising discontent. He uncovers a complex com-munication network, illuminating the way information circulated ina semi-literate society.

This lucid and entertaining book reminds us of both theimportance of oral exchanges in the history of communication and

the power of “viral” networks longbefore our internet age.

DOWNLOAD THE SONGS DISCUSSED IN

POETRY AND THE POLICE, AS PERFORMED BY MEZZO-SOPRANO

HÉLÈNE DELAVAULT, ACCOMPANIED BY GUITARIST CLAUDE PAVY:WWW.HUP.HARVARD.EDU/FEATURES/DARPOE/

HÉLÈNE DELAVAULT studied at the Paris Conservatoire and

The Julliard School, has sung in operas and operettas, and has

also created her own cabarets, including an exploration of the

world of bawdy songs in eighteenth-century France.

BELKNAP PRESS | NOVEMBER | 5 1⁄2 X 8 1⁄4 | 9 HALFTONES, 1 CHART |240 PP. | ISBN 978-0-674-05715-9 | $25.95 (£19.95 UK) | HISTORY

w w w . h u p . h a r v a r d . e d u � h a r v a r d u n i v e r s i t y p r e s s 2 1

ROBERT

DARNTON is

Carl H. Pforzheimer

University

Professor and

Director of the

University Library

at Harvard

University. An

internationally recognized scholar on the

history of the book and the literary world of

Enlightenment France, Darnton is the author of

many books, including The Devil in the Holy

Water, or the Art of Slander from Louis XIV to

Napoleon and The Case for Books.

� Author Appearances

� National Print Attention

� National Print andOnline Advertising:New York Review ofBooks, TLS, LondonReview of Books, TheAtlantic Online, NewRepublic Online,Harper’s Online, HistoryNews Network

Page 24: Harvard University Press Fall 2010 Catalog

w w w . h u p . h a r v a r d . e d u � h a r v a r d u n i v e r s i t y p r e s s2 2

How Many Friends DoesOne Person Need?Dunbar’s Number and Other Evolutionary Quirks

Robin Dunbar

“AN ECLECTIC COLLECTION OF ESSAYS ON HUMANITY AND EVOLUTION WITH

SOMETHING FOR EVERYONE . . . [DUNBAR] SPEAKS WITH AUTHORITY AND SEDUCES

US AS ONLY A MASTER CAN.”

—KATE DOUGLAS

Why do men talk and women gossip, and which is better for you? Why ismonogamy a drain on the brain? And why should you be suspicious ofsomeone who has more than 150 friends on Facebook?

We are the product of our evolutionary history, and this historycolors our everyday lives—from why we joke to the depth of our religiousbeliefs. In HowMany Friends Does One Person Need? Robin Dunbar usesgroundbreaking experiments that have forever changed the way evolu-tionary biologists explain how the distant past underpins our currentbehavior.

We know so much more now than Darwin ever did, but the coreof modern evolutionary theory lies firmly in Darwin’s elegantly simple idea:organisms behave in ways that enhance the frequency with which genesare passed on to future generations. This idea is at the heart of Dunbar’sbook, which seeks to explain why humans behave as they do. Stimulating,provocative, and immensely enjoyable, his book invites you to explore thenumber of friends you have, whether you have your father’s brain or yourmother’s, whether morning sickness might

actually be good for you, why Barack Obama’s 2008 victory wasa foregone conclusion, what Gaelic has to do with frankincense,and why we laugh. In the process, Dunbar examines the role ofreligion in human evolution, the fact that most of us have unex-pectedly famous ancestors, and why men and women neverseem able to see eye to eye on color.

NOVEMBER | 5 1⁄2 X 8 1⁄4 | 290 PP. | ISBN 978-0-674-05716-6 |$27.95 / USA | SCIENCE

ROB IN

DUNBAR is

Professor of

Psychology

at the University of Liverpool and

author of Grooming, Gossip, and

the Evolution of Language and The

Trouble with Science (both from

Harvard).

� National Print Attention

� National Print andOnline Advertising:New York Review ofBooks, Harper’s Online,Science Online, NatureOnline, Seed MagazineOnline

� Online promotion

Page 25: Harvard University Press Fall 2010 Catalog

The LabCreativity and Culture

David Edwards

“EDWARDS INFECTS US WITH HIS SUBJECTS’ CREATIVITY. WHEN THE FINAL CHAPTER

TURNS FROM VIGNETTES TO HIS UTOPIAN LABORATOIRE, WE’RE ROOTING FOR IT TO

SUCCEED.”

—ALICE W. FLAHERTY, NATURE (PRAISE FOR ARTSciENcE)

Six months before opening Le Laboratoire David Edwards visited Hans Ulrich Obrist, who hadco-curated a famous exhibit, Laboratorium, that explored connections between art and science.“Famous, yes,” said Hans, “which I find ironic since almost nobody saw it. You have to be care-ful getting too near contemporary science.”

But this was precisely where David Edwards chose to be.His book, The Lab, promotes surprising innovations in culture,industry, and society by exploring new ideas in the arts and designat the frontiers of science. In The Lab Edwards argues for a newkind of educational art lab based on a contemporary science labmodel—the “artscience lab.” With examples ranging from breath-able chocolate to contemporary art installations that explore theneuroscience of fear, he shows how students learn by translatingideas alongside experienced creators and exhibiting risky experi-mental processes in gallery settings. Idea translation from concep-tion to realization is in turn facilitated by a network ofcomplementary labs whose missions range from education toindustrial and humanitarian development.

A manifesto of a new innovation model driven by thearts, this is the first detailed description of an emerging cultural

phenomenon in the United Statesand Europe where artists and sci-entists collaborate to produceintriguing cultural content andsurprising innovations. It alsooffers a fresh look at the creativeprocess as it applies to experiential education, museumexhibition, and industrial innovation.

OCTOBER | 5 1⁄2 X 8 1⁄4 | 10 HALFTONES | 224 PP. |ISBN 978-0-674-05719-7 | $22.95 (£16.95 UK) | SCIENCE / ART

Photo by Klane Fabien Thouvenin

w w w . h u p . h a r v a r d . e d u � h a r v a r d u n i v e r s i t y p r e s s 2 3

DAV ID EDWARDS

teaches at Harvard

University and is

founding director of Le Laboratoire in Paris and

the Idea Translation Lab at Harvard. His work spans

the arts and sciences and lies at the core of a

network of multi-disciplinary labs in Europe, USA

and Africa. Edwards is the founder of Medicine in

Need and the Boston-based Cloud Foundation that

oversees Cloud Place, a dynamic center for urban

youth arts, and that launched the $100K

ArtScience Innovation Prize. The youngest-ever

member of the National Academy of Engineering,

Edwards was a featured speaker at Davos in 2010.

The author of ArtScience (Harvard), his creative

work is described at www.davidideas.com.� Author Appearances

� National Print Attention

� National Print andOnline Advertising:Bookforum, Harper’sOnline, Science Online,Nature Online, SeedMagazine Online,Wired.com, Thechronicle of HigherEducation Online,Economist Online

� Online promotion

Page 26: Harvard University Press Fall 2010 Catalog

w w w . h u p . h a r v a r d . e d u � h a r v a r d u n i v e r s i t y p r e s s2 4

The Death MarchesThe Final Phase of Nazi Genocide

Daniel BlatmanTranslated by Chaya Galai

From January 1945, in the last months of the Third Reich, about 250,000 inmates of concen-tration camps perished on death marches and in countless incidents of mass slaughter. Theywere murdered with merciless brutality by their SS guards, by army and police units, and oftenby gangs of civilians as they passed through German and Austrian towns and villages. Even inthe bloody annals of the Nazi regime, this final death blow was unique in character and scope.

In this first comprehensive attempt to answer the ques-tions raised by this final murderous rampage, the author drawson the testimonies of victims, perpetrators, and bystanders.Hunting through archives throughout the world, Daniel Blat-man sets out to explain—to the extent that is possible—theeffort invested by mankind’s most lethal regime in liquidatingthe remnants of the enemies of the “Aryan race” before it aban-doned the stage of history. What were the characteristics of thislast Nazi genocide? How was it linked to the earlier stages, theslaughter of millions in concen-tration camps? How did the pre-vailing chaos help to create theconditions that made the finalmurderous rampage possible?

In its exploration of a topic nearly neglected in the cur-rent history of the Shoah, this book offers unusual insight intothe workings, and the unraveling, of the Nazi regime. It com-bines micro-historical accounts of representative massacres withan overall analysis of the collapse of the Third Reich, helping usto understand a seemingly inexplicable chapter in history.

BELKNAP PRESS | JANUARY | 6 3⁄8 X 9 1⁄4 | 12 HALFTONES, 5 MAPS |524 PP. | ISBN 978-0-674-05049-5 | $35.00 (£24.95 UK) | HISTORY

DAN IEL BLATMAN

is Professor of Jewish

History and Head of

the Avraham Harman

Institute of Contemporary Jewry, The

Hebrew University of Jerusalem.

� National Print andOnline Advertising:New York Review ofBooks, TLS, LondonReview of Books,commentary, New YorkReview of Books Online,History News Network

� Online promotion

Page 27: Harvard University Press Fall 2010 Catalog

“I have always loved theHoly Tongue”Isaac Casaubon, the Jews, and a Forgotten Chapter in Renaissance Scholarship

Anthony Grafton and JoannaWeinberg

Fusing high scholarship with high drama, Anthony Grafton and Joanna Weinberg uncover asecret and extraordinary aspect of a legendary Renaissance scholar’s already celebrated achieve-ment. The French Protestant Isaac Casaubon (1559–1614) is known to us through his pedan-tic namesake in George Eliot’s Middlemarch. But in this book, thereal Casaubon emerges as a genuine literary hero, an intrepidexplorer in the world of books. With a flair for storytelling reminis-cent of Umberto Eco, Grafton and Weinberg follow Casaubon as heunearths the lost continent of Hebrew learning—and adds thisancient lore to the well-known Renaissance revival of Latin andGreek.

The mystery begins with Mark Pattison’s nineteenth-century biography of Casaubon. Here we encounter the ProtestantCasaubon embroiled in intellectual quarrels with the Italian and

Catholic orator Cesare Baronio.Setting out to understand thenature of this imbroglio, Graftonand Weinberg discover Casaubon’sknowledge of Hebrew. Close read-ing and sedulous inquiry wereCasaubon’s tools in recapturing thelost learning of the ancients—andthese are the tools that serve Grafton and Weinberg as theypore through pre-1600 books in Hebrew, and throughCasaubon’s own manuscript notebooks. Their search takesthem from Oxford to Cambridge, from Dublin to Cambridge,Massachusetts, as they reveal how the scholar discovered thelearning of the Hebrews—and at what cost.

BELKNAP PRESS | CARL NEWELL JACKSON LECTURES |JANUARY | 7 X 10 | 42 HALFTONES | 400 PP. |ISBN 978-0-674-04840-9 | $35.00 (£25.95 UK) |BIOGRAPHY / HISTORY

w w w . h u p . h a r v a r d . e d u � h a r v a r d u n i v e r s i t y p r e s s 2 5

ANTHONY

GRAFTON is

Henry Putnam

University

Professor of

History and the

Humanities, Princeton University. He is the

author of many books and an editor of The

Classical Tradition (page 13). JOANNA

WE INBERG is a Reader in Hebrew and

Jewish Studies, University of Oxford.� National Print Attention

� National Print andOnline Advertising:New York Review ofBooks, TLS, LondonReview of Books, NewRepublic, Bookforum,commentary, New YorkReview of Books Online,History News Network

Page 28: Harvard University Press Fall 2010 Catalog

2 6

Pilgrims of theVerticalYosemite Rock Climbers and Nature at Risk

Joseph E. Taylor III

Few things suggest rugged individualism as powerfully as the solitary mountaineer testing hisor her mettle in the rough country. Yet the long history of wilderness sport complicates thisimage. In this surprising story of the premier rock-climbing venue in the United States, Pilgrimsof the Vertical offers insight into the nature of wilderness adventure.

From the founding era of mountain climbing in Victorian Europe to present-day climb-ing gyms, Pilgrims of the Vertical shows how ever-changing alignments of nature, technology,gender, sport, and consumer culture have shaped climbers’ relations to nature and to each other.

Even in Yosemite Valley, a premier site for sporting and environmentalculture since the 1800s, elite athletes cannot be entirely disentangledfrom the many men and women seeking recreation and camaraderie.

Following these climbers through time, Joseph Taylor uncoverslessons about the relationship of individuals to groups, sport to society,and nature to culture. He also shows how social and historical contextsinfluenced adventurers’ choices and experiences, and why some becameleading environmental activists—including John Muir, David Brower, andYvon Chouinard. In a world in which wild nature is increasingly associ-ated with play, and virtuous play with environmental values, Pilgrims ofthe Vertical explains when and how these ideas developed, and why theybecame intimately linked to consumerism.

OCTOBER | 6 1⁄8 X 9 1⁄4 | 36 HALFTONES, 3 MAPS | 398 PP. |ISBN 978-0-674-05287-1 | $29.95 (£22.95 UK) | SPORTS

JOSEPH E .

TAYLOR I I I

is Associate

Professor,

Departments of History and

Geography, Simon Fraser

University.

� Author Appearances

� National Print andOnline Advertising:New York Review ofBooks, Sierra Online,History News Network

� Online promotion

w w w . h u p . h a r v a r d . e d u � h a r v a r d u n i v e r s i t y p r e s s

Page 29: Harvard University Press Fall 2010 Catalog

The Heart ofWilliam JamesWilliam JamesEdited and with an Introduction byRobert Richardson

On the one hundredth anniversary of the death of William James, Robert Richardson, authorof the magisterialWilliam James: In the Maelstrom of American Modernism, assembles a wide-ranging selection of essays and writings that reveal the evolution of James’s thought over time,especially as it was continually being shaped by the converging influences of psychology, phi-losophy, and religion throughout his life.

Proceeding chronologically, the volume begins with“What Is an Emotion,” James’s early, notable, and still contro-versial argument that many of our emotions follow from (ratherthan cause) physical or physiological reactions. The book con-cludes with “The Moral Equivalent of War,” one of the greatestanti-war pieces ever written, perhaps even more relevant nowthan when it was first published. In between, in essays on “TheDilemma of Determinism,” “The Hidden Self,” “Habit,” and“The Will”; in chapters from The Principles of Psychology andThe Varieties of Religious Experience; and in such pieces as “Ona Certain Blindness in Human Beings,” “What Makes a Life Sig-nificant,” and “Philosophical Conceptions and Practical Results,” we witness the evolution ofJames’s philosophical thinking, his pragmatism, and his radical empiricism. Throughout, Richard-

son’s deeply informed introductions place James’s work in itsproper biographical, historical, and philosophical context.

In essay after essay, James calls us to live a fuller,richer, better life, to seek out and use our best energies andsympathies. As every day is the day of creation and judgment,so every age was once the new age—and as this book makesabundantly clear, William James’s writings are still the gatewayto many a new world.

AUGUST | 6 1⁄8 X 9 1⁄4 | 1 LINE ILLUS. | 372 PP. |ISBN 978-0-674-05561-2 | $29.95 (£22.95 UK) |PHILOSOPHY

w w w . h u p . h a r v a r d . e d u � h a r v a r d u n i v e r s i t y p r e s s 2 7

ROBERT

R ICHARDSON is

Adjunct Professor of

Letters at Wesleyan

University.

� National Print andOnline Advertising:New York Review ofBooks, TLS, LondonReview of Books

Page 30: Harvard University Press Fall 2010 Catalog

w w w . h u p . h a r v a r d . e d u � h a r v a r d u n i v e r s i t y p r e s s2 8

What Is Mental Illness?Richard J. McNally

According to a major health survey, nearly half of all Americans have been mentally ill at somepoint in their lives—more than a quarter in the last year. Can this be true? What exactly doesit mean, anyway? What’s a disorder, and what’s just a struggle with real life?

This lucid and incisive book cuts through both professional jargon and polemical hotair, to describe the intense political and intellectual struggles over what counts as a “real” dis-order, and what goes into the “DSM,” the psychiatric bible. Is schizophrenia a disorder?Absolutely. Is homosexuality? It was—till gay rights activists drove it out of the DSM a gener-ation ago. What about new and controversial diagnoses? Is “social anxiety disorder” a way of

saying that it’s sick to be shy, or “female sexual arousal disorder” thatit’s sick to be tired?

An advisor to the DSM, but also a fierce critic of exaggeratedoveruse, McNally defends the careful approach of describing disordersby patterns of symptoms that can be seen, and illustrates how oftenthe system medicalizes everyday emotional life.

Neuroscience, genetics, and evolutionary psychology may illu-minate the biological bases of mental illness, but at this point, McNallyargues, no science can draw a bright line between disorder and dis-tress. In a pragmatic and humane con-clusion, he offers questions for patientsand professionals alike to help under-

stand, and cope with, the sorrows and psychopathologies ofeveryday life.

BELKNAP PRESS | JANUARY | 5 1⁄2 X 8 1⁄4 | 304 PP. |ISBN 978-0-674-04649-8 | $27.95 (£20.95 UK) |PSYCHOLOGY

� National Print Attention

� National Print andOnline Advertising:New York Review ofBooks, TLS, LondonReview of Books,Harper’s, Science Online,Nature Online,Psychology Today Online

� Online promotion

R ICHARD J .

MCNALLY is

Professor of

Psychology at

Harvard University and author of

Remembering Trauma (Harvard).

Page 31: Harvard University Press Fall 2010 Catalog

College Admissions forthe 21st CenturyRobert J. Sternberg

SATs, ACTs, GPAs. Everyone knows that these scores can’t tell a college everything that’s impor-tant about an applicant. But what else should admissions officers look for, and how can theyknow it when they see it? In College Admissions for the 21st Century a leading researcher onintelligence and creativity offers a bold and practical approach to college admissions testing.

Standardized tests are measures of memory and analyticalskills. But the ever-changing global society beyond a college campusneeds more than just those qualities, argues Robert Sternberg. Tomor-row’s leaders and citizens also need creativity, practicality, and wisdom.

How can the potential for those complex qualities be meas-ured? One answer is “Kaleidoscope,” a new initiative in undergraduateadmissions, first used at Tufts University. Its open-ended questions forapplicants, and the means used to score the answers, gives applicantsand admissions officers the chance to go beyond standardized tests.

Does it work? As Sternberg describes in detail, Kaleidoscopemeasures predicted first-year academic success, over and above SATsand high school GPAs, and predicted first-year extracurricular activi-

ties, leadership, and active citizenshipas well. And every year that Kaleido-scope measures were used, the enter-ing class’s average SATs and highschool GPAs went up too.

What worked at Tufts can work elsewhere. Newkinds of assessments, like Kaleidoscope, can liberate many col-leges and students from the narrowness of standardized testsand inspire new approaches to teaching for new kinds of tal-ented, motivated citizens of the world.

OCTOBER | 5 1⁄2 X 8 1⁄4 | 224 PP. | ISBN 978-0-674-04823-2 |$23.95 (£17.95 UK) | EDUCATION

w w w . h u p . h a r v a r d . e d u � h a r v a r d u n i v e r s i t y p r e s s 2 9

ROBERT J .

STERNBERG ,

formerly IBM

Professor of

Psychology and

Education and

Professor of Management at Yale,

was Dean of Arts and Sciences at

Tufts University from 2005 to 2010.

� National Print Attention

� National Print andOnline Advertising:New York Review ofBooks, HarvardEducational Review,chronicle of HigherEducation Online, insideHigher Education Online,change MagazineOnline

� Online promotion

Page 32: Harvard University Press Fall 2010 Catalog

w w w . h u p . h a r v a r d . e d u � h a r v a r d u n i v e r s i t y p r e s s3 0

No Right TurnConservative Politics in a Liberal America

David T. Courtwright

“CRISPLY WRITTEN, COLORFUL, AND OFTEN OUT-OF-THE-BOX ORIGINAL, THIS IS A

BOLD, SWEEPING LOOK AT THE LAST FOUR DECADES OF AMERICAN HISTORY.”

—GIL TROY, AUTHOR OF LEAdiNg FROM THE cENTER

Few question the “right turn” America took after 1966, when liberal political power began towane. But if they did, No Right Turn suggests, they might discover that all was not really “right”with the conservative golden age. A provocative overview of a half century of American poli-

tics, the book takes a hard look at the counterrevolutionary dreams ofliberalism’s enemies—to overturn people’s reliance on expanding gov-ernment, reverse the moral and sexual revolutions, and win the CultureWar—and finds them largely unfulfilled.

David Courtwright deftly profiles celebrated and controversialfigures, from Clare Booth Luce, Barry Goldwater, and the Kennedybrothers to Jerry Falwell, David Stockman, and Lee Atwater. He showsus Richard Nixon’s keen talent for turning popular anxieties aboutmorality and federal meddling to Republican advantage—and his inabil-ity to translate this advantage into reactionary policies. Corporate inter-ests, boomer lifestyles, and the media weighed heavily against Nixonand his successors, who placated their base with high-profile attacks oncrime, drugs, and welfare dependency.Meanwhile, religious conservatives

floundered on abortion and school prayer, obscenity, gay rights,and legalized vices like gambling, and fiscal conservativeswatched in dismay as the bills mounted.

We see how President Reagan’s mélange of big gov-ernment, strong defense, lower taxes, higher deficits, massimprisonment, and patriotic symbolism proved an illusory formof conservatism. Ultimately, conservatives themselves rebelledagainst George W. Bush’s profligate brand of Reaganism.Courtwright’s account is both surprising and compelling, a brac-ing argument against some of our most cherished clichés aboutrecent American history.

OCTOBER | 6 1⁄8 X 9 1⁄4 | 22 HALFTONES | 320 PP. |ISBN 978-0-674-04677-1 | $29.95 (£22.95 UK) | HISTORY / POLITICS

DAV ID T.

COURTWR IGHT

is Presidential

Professor at the

University of North Florida and the

author of several books, including

Forces of Habit (Harvard).

� National Print andOnline Advertising:New York Review ofBooks, The Atlantic, TheNation Online, NewRepublic Online,American ProspectOnline, Weekly StandardOnline, Politico Online,Liberal and conservativeblogs, History NewsNetwork

Page 33: Harvard University Press Fall 2010 Catalog

Fugitive JusticeRunaways, Rescuers, and Slavery on Trial

Steven Lubet

During the tumultuous decade before the Civil War, no issue was more divisive than the pur-suit and return of fugitive slaves—a practice enforced under the Fugitive Slave Act of 1850.When free Blacks and their abolitionist allies intervened, prosecutions and trials inevitably fol-lowed. These cases involved high legal, political, and—most of all—human drama, with run-aways desperate for freedom, their defenders seeking recourse to a “higher law” and normallyfair-minded judges (even some opposed to slavery) considering the disposition of human beingsas property.

Fugitive Justice tells the stories of three of the most dra-matic fugitive slave trials of the 1850s, bringing to vivid life thedetermination of the fugitives, the radical tactics of their rescuers,the brutal doggedness of the slavehunters, and the tortuousresponse of the federal courts. These cases underscore the crucialrole that runaway slaves played in building the tensions that led tothe Civil War, and they show us how “civil disobedience” devel-oped as a legal defense. As they unfold we can also see how suchtrials—whether of rescuers or of the slaves themselves—helpedbuild the northern anti-slavery movement, even as they pushedsouthern firebrands closer to secession.

How could somethingso evil be treated so routinely by just men? The answer saysmuch about how deeply the institution of slavery had pene-trated American life even in free states. Fugitive Justice pow-erfully illuminates this painful episode in American history, andits role in the nation’s inexorable march to war.

BELKNAP PRESS | NOVEMBER | 6 1⁄8 X 9 1⁄4 | 340 PP. |ISBN 978-0-674-04704-4 | $29.95 / COBE | HISTORY

w w w . h u p . h a r v a r d . e d u � h a r v a r d u n i v e r s i t y p r e s s 3 1

STEVEN LUBET

is Williams

Memorial Professor

of Law and Director

of the Bartlit Center

for Trial Strategy, Northwestern

University.

� National Print andOnline Advertising:New York Review ofBooks, The Atlantic, TheNation Online, NewRepublic Online,American ProspectOnline, Weekly StandardOnline, Politico Online,Liberal and conservativeblogs, History NewsNetwork

Page 34: Harvard University Press Fall 2010 Catalog

w w w . h u p . h a r v a r d . e d u � h a r v a r d u n i v e r s i t y p r e s s3 2

Eden on the CharlesThe Making of Boston

Michael Rawson

Drinking a glass of tap water, strolling in a park, hopping a train for the suburbs: some aspectsof city life are so familiar that we don’t think twice about them. But such simple actions arestructured by complex relationships with our natural world. The contours of these relation-ships—social, cultural, political, economic, and legal—were established during America’s firstgreat period of urbanization in the nineteenth century, and Boston, one of the earliest cities inAmerica, often led the nation in designing them. A richly textured cultural and social historyof the development of nineteenth-century Boston, this book provides a new environmental per-

spective on the creation of America’s first cities.

Eden on the Charles explores how Bostonians channeled countrylakes through miles of pipeline to provide clean water; dredged the oceanto deepen the harbor; filled tidal flats and covered the peninsula withhouses, shops, and factories; and created a metropolitan system of parksand greenways, facilitating the conversion of fields into suburbs. The bookshows how, in Boston, different class and ethnic groups brought rival ideasof nature and competing visions of a “city upon a hill” to the process ofurbanization—and were forced to conform their goals to the realities ofBoston’s distinctive natural setting. The outcomes of their battles for controlover the city’s development were ultimately recorded in the very fabric ofBoston itself. In Boston’s history, we find the seeds of the environmental

relationships that—for better or worse—have defined urban America to this day.

OCTOBER | 5 1⁄2 X 8 1⁄4 | 12 MAPS, 17 HALFTONES | 350 PP. |ISBN 978-0-674-04841-6 | $29.95 (£22.95 UK) | HISTORY

M ICHAEL

RAWSON

is Assistant

Professor of

History, Brooklyn College,

City University of New York.

� Author Appearances inBoston Area

� National Print andOnline Advertising:New York Review ofBooks, Boston Review,Phoenix Online,Boston.com, HistoryNews Network

� Online promotion

Page 35: Harvard University Press Fall 2010 Catalog

Journey Throughthe AfterlifeThe Ancient Egyptian Book of the Dead

Edited by John H. Taylor

The Book of the Dead is not a single text but a compilation ofspells that the ancient Egyptians believed would assist them inthe afterlife as they made their perilous journey toward therealm of the gods and the ultimate state of eternity. No two copies

are identical. The spells are often accompanied by coloredvignettes, which graphically show the imagined landscapeof the Netherworld, the gods and demons whom thedeceased will meet, and the critical “weighing of theheart”—the judgment that will determine whether thetraveler will be admitted into the afterlife or condemned todestruction by the monstrous “Devourer.”

With contributions from leading scholars anddetailed catalog entries that interpret the spells and paintedscenes, this fascinating and important book affords agreater understanding of ancient Egyptian belief systemsand poignantly reveals the hopes and fears of mortal manabout the “world” beyond death. The whole is beautifully illustrated with specially commis-sioned photographs of these exceptional papyri and an array of contextual funerary objects—painted coffins, gilded masks, amulets, jewelry, tomb figurines, and mummy trappings.

NOVEMBER | 11 X 11 | 240 COLOR ILLUS. | 312 PP. |ISBN 978-0-674-05750-0 | $35.00 / NA |ART / MIND, BODY, SPIRIT

Images © The Trustees of the Brit ish Museum

3 3

JOHN H . TAYLOR

is a curator at the

British Museum specializing in

ancient Egyptian funerary

archaeology.

� National Print andOnline Advertising:New York Review ofBooks, The AtlanticOnline, Harper’s Online,London Review of BooksOnline

� Online promotion

w w w . h u p . h a r v a r d . e d u � h a r v a r d u n i v e r s i t y p r e s s

Page 36: Harvard University Press Fall 2010 Catalog

3 4

Seeing PatientsUnconscious Bias in Health Care

Augustus A. White III, M.D.with David Chanoff

If you’re going to have a heart attack, an organ transplant, or a joint replacement, here’s the keyto getting the very best medical care: be a white, straight, middle-class male. This book by a pio-neering black surgeon takes on one of the few critically important topics that haven’t figured inthe heated debate over health care reform—the largely hidden yet massive injustice of bias inmedical treatment.

Growing up in Jim Crow–era Tennessee and training andteaching in overwhelmingly white medical institutions, Gus Whitewitnessed firsthand how prejudice works in the world of medicine.And while race relations have changed dramatically, old ways of think-ing die hard. In Seeing Patients White draws upon his experience instartlingly different worlds to make sense of the unconscious bias thatriddles medical treatment, and to explore what it means for healthcare in a diverse twenty-first-century America.

White and co-author David Chanoff use extensive researchand interviews with leading physicians to show how subconsciousstereotyping influences doctor-patient interactions, diagnosis, andtreatment. Their book brings together insights from the worlds ofsocial psychology, neuroscience, and clinical practice to define theissues clearly and, most importantly, tooutline a concrete approach to fixingthis fundamental inequity in the deliv-ery of health care.

JANUARY | 6 1⁄8 X 9 1⁄4 |17 HALFTONES | 276 PP. |ISBN 978-0-674-04905-5 |$27.95 (£20.95 UK) |MEDICINE

Augustus White and his wife Anita, 1970.

� National Print andOnline Advertising:New Republic, JAMA,New England Journal ofMedicine, The Lancet,American ProspectOnline, Liberal andconservative blognetworks

� Online promotion

AUGUSTUS A .

WH ITE I I I ,

M .D. , is

Professor

of Medical Education and Orthopedic Surgery

at Harvard Medical School and the first African

American department chief at Harvard’s

teaching hospitals. DAV ID CHANOFF is a

writer living in Marlborough, MA.

w w w . h u p . h a r v a r d . e d u � h a r v a r d u n i v e r s i t y p r e s s

Page 37: Harvard University Press Fall 2010 Catalog

The Offensive InternetSpeech, Privacy, and Reputation

Edited by Saul Levmore and Martha C. NussbaumContributors include the editors, Cass Sunstein,Daniel J. Solove, Brian Leiter, and Geoffrey Stone

The Internet has been romanticized as a zone of freedom. The alluring combination of sophis-ticated technology with low barriers to entry and instantaneous outreach to millions of users hasmesmerized libertarians and communitarians alike. Law-makers have joined the celebration, passing the Commu-nications Decency Act, which enables Internet ServiceProviders to allow unregulated discourse without dangerof liability, all in the name of enhancing freedom of speech.But an unregulated Internet is a breeding ground for offen-sive conduct.

At last we have a book that begins to focus onabuses made possible by anonymity, freedom from liability,and lack of oversight. The distinguished scholars assembledin this volume, drawn from law and philosophy, connectthe absence of legal oversight with harassment and dis-crimination. Questioning the simplistic notion that abusivespeech and mobocracy are the inevitable outcomes of newtechnology, they argue that current misuse is the outgrowthof social, technological, and legal choices. Seeing thisclearly will help us to be better informed about our options.

In a field still dominated by a frontier perspective,this book has the potential to be a real game changer.Armed with example after example of harassment in Internet chat rooms and forums, theauthors detail some of the vile and hateful speech that the current combination of law and tech-nology has bred. The facts are then treated to analysis and policy prescriptions. Read this bookand you will never again see the Internet through rose-colored glasses.

JANUARY | 6 1⁄8 X 9 1⁄4 | 295 PP. | ISBN 978-0-674-05089-1 | $27.95 * (£20.95 UK) | CURRENT AFFAIRS / LAW

w w w . h u p . h a r v a r d . e d u � h a r v a r d u n i v e r s i t y p r e s s 3 5

SAUL LEVMORE is the

William B. Graham

Professor of Law at the

University of Chicago Law

School. MARTHA C .

NUSSBAUM is Ernst

Freund Distinguished Service Professor of

Law and Ethics at the University of

Chicago Law School and the author of

several books, including The Clash Within,

Frontiers of Justice, and Cultivating

Humanity (all from Harvard).

Page 38: Harvard University Press Fall 2010 Catalog

w w w . h u p . h a r v a r d . e d u � h a r v a r d u n i v e r s i t y p r e s s3 6

The Evolution of theHuman HeadDaniel E. Lieberman

“LIEBERMAN’S INTEGRATED APPROACH WILL MAKE HIS BOOK A FORUM FOR A WAY

OF THINKING IN HUMAN EVOLUTION THAT HAS NOT YET FOUND ITS EQUAL IN PRINT.”

—CHRISTOPHER DEAN, UNIVERSITY COLLEGE LONDON

In one sense, human heads function much like those of other mammals. We use them to chew,smell, swallow, think, hear, and so on. But, in other respects, the human head is quite unusual.Unlike other animals, even our great ape cousins, our heads are short and wide, very big brained,

snoutless, largely furless, and perched on a short, nearly vertical neck.Daniel E. Lieberman sets out to explain how the human head works, andwhy our heads evolved in this peculiarly human way.

Exhaustively researched and years in the making, this innovativebook documents how the many components of the head function, howthey evolved since we diverged from the apes, and how they interact indiverse ways both functionally and developmentally, causing them to behighly integrated. This integration not only permits the head’s many unitsto accommodate each other as they grow and work, but also facilitatesevolutionary change. Lieberman shows how, when, and why the majortransformations evident in the evolution of the human head occurred.The special way the head is integrated, Lieberman argues, made it possi-

ble for a few developmental shifts to have had widespread effects on craniofacial growth, yetstill permit the head to function exquisitely.

This is the first book to explore in depth what happened in human evolution by inte-grating principles of development and functional morphology with the hominin fossil record.The Evolution of the Human Head will permanently change the study of human evolution andhas widespread ramifications for thinking about other branches of evolutionary biology.

BELKNAP PRESS | JANUARY | 6 3⁄8 X 9 1⁄4 | 55 HALFTONES, 110 LINE ILLUS. | 728 PP. |ISBN 978-0-674-04636-8 | $39.95 * (£29.95 UK) | SCIENCE

DAN IEL E .

L I EBERMAN

is Professor

of Human

Evolutionary Biology at

Harvard.

Page 39: Harvard University Press Fall 2010 Catalog

Dilemmas and ConnectionsSelected Essays

Charles Taylor

There are, always, more things in heaven and earth than are dreamt of in one’s philosophy—and in these essays Charles Taylor turns to those things not fully imagined or avenues not whollyexplored in his epochal A Secular Age. Here Taylor talks in detail about thinkers who are hisallies and interlocutors, such as Iris Murdoch, Alasdair MacIntyre, Robert Brandom, and PaulCelan. He offers major contributions to social theory, expanding on the issues of nationalism,democratic exclusionism, religious mobilizations, and moder-nity. And he delves even more deeply into themes taken up inA Secular Age : the continuity of religion from the past into thefuture; the nature of the secular; the folly of hoping to live by“reason alone”; the perils of moralism. He also speculates onhow irrationality emerges from the heart of rationality itself,and why violence breaks out again and again.

In A Secular Age, Taylor more evidently foregroundedhis Catholic faith, and there are several essays here that fur-ther explore that faith. Overall, this is a hopeful book, showinghow, while acknowledging the force of religion and the per-sistence of violence and folly, we nonetheless have the powerto move forward once we have given up the brittle pretensionsof a narrow rationalism.

BELKNAP PRESS | FEBRUARY | 6 1⁄8 X 9 1⁄4 | 454 PP. |ISBN 978-0-674-05532-2 | $39.95 * (£29.95 UK) | PHILOSOPHY

w w w . h u p . h a r v a r d . e d u � h a r v a r d u n i v e r s i t y p r e s s 3 7

CHARLES TAYLOR is

Professor Emeritus of

Philosophy, McGill

University. A Secular

Age, also published by

Harvard, was judged a

“best book of the year” in 2007 by

Publishers Weekly, Toronto Globe and Mail,

and the Times Literary Supplement, among

others. He is the author of many books,

including The Ethics of Authenticity,

Sources of the Self, and Philosophical

Arguments (all from Harvard).

Page 40: Harvard University Press Fall 2010 Catalog

w w w . h u p . h a r v a r d . e d u � h a r v a r d u n i v e r s i t y p r e s s3 8

The Colors of ZionBlacks, Jews, and Irish from 1845 to 1945

George Bornstein

“BORNSTEIN’S EMBRACE OF A MORE HUMANE VISION OF THE WORLD THAT

TRANSCENDS NARROW GROUP LOYALTIES MAY STRIKE SOME READERS AS

SENTIMENTAL OR SOMEHOW OUT OF KEEPING WITH A SERIOUS WORK OF CULTURAL

HISTORY. BUT THE PURPOSE OF THIS BOOK IS TO ARGUE THAT WE HAVE LITTLE HOPE

OF OVERCOMING THE DIFFERENCES OF THE PRESENT UNLESS WE HAVE A MUCH

BETTER GRASP OF THE DIFFERENCES OF THE PAST.”

—ERIC SUNDQUIST

A major reevaluation of relationships among Blacks, Jews, and Irish inthe years between the Irish Famine and the end of World War II, TheColors of Zion argues that the cooperative efforts and sympathiesamong these three groups, each persecuted and subjugated in its ownway, was much greater than often acknowledged today. For the Black,Jewish, and Irish writers, poets, musicians, and politicians at the cen-ter of this transatlantic study, a sense of shared wrongs inspired repeatedoutpourings of sympathy. If what they have to say now surprises us, itis because our current constructions of interracial and ethnic relationshave overemphasized conflict and division. As George Bornstein says inhis Introduction, he chooses “to let the principals speak for themselves.”

While acknowledging past conflicts and tensions, Bornsteininsists on recovering the “lost connections” through which these groups

frequently defined their plights as well as their aspirations. In doing so, he examines a widerange of materials, including immigration laws, lynching, hostile race theorists, Nazis and Klans-men, discriminatory university practices, and Jewish publishing houses alongside popular playslike The Melting Pot and Abie’s Irish Rose, canonical novels like Ulysses and Daniel Deronda,music from slave spirituals to jazz, poetry, and early films such as The Jazz Singer. The modelsof brotherhood that extended beyond ethnocentrism a century ago, the author argues, mightdo so once again today, if only we bear them in mind. He also urges us to move beyond arbi-trary and invidious categories of race and ethnicity.

FEBRUARY | 6 1⁄8 X 9 1⁄4 | 20 HALFTONES | 250 PP. | ISBN 978-0-674-05701-2 |$27.95 * (£20.95 UK) | HISTORY

GEORGE

BORNSTE IN

is C. A. Patrides

Professor of

Literature, Emeritus, at the

University of Michigan, Ann Arbor.

Page 41: Harvard University Press Fall 2010 Catalog

The Two Faces ofAmerican FreedomAziz Rana

“A STRIKINGLY ORIGINAL AND POWERFUL ACCOUNT OF AMERICAN POLITICAL

CULTURE.”

—JEDEDIAH PURDY

“WILL PUT THE CONCEPT OF SETTLER FREEDOM ON THE MAP OF SCHOLARSHIP ON

AMERICAN POLITICAL THOUGHT, AMERICAN POLITICAL DEVELOPMENT, AND

DEMOCRATIC THEORY.”

—ROGERS SMITH

The Two Faces of American Freedom boldly reinterprets the Americanpolitical tradition from the colonial period to modern times, placing issuesof race relations, immigration, and presidentialism in the context of shift-ing notions of empire and citizenship. Today, while the U.S. enjoystremendous military and economic power, citizens are increasingly insu-lated from everyday decision-making. This was not always the case. Amer-ica, Aziz Rana argues, began as a settler society grounded in an ideal offreedom as the exercise of continuous self-rule—one that joined directpolitical participation with economic independence. However, this visionof freedom was politically bound to the subordination of marginalizedgroups, especially slaves, Native Americans, and women. These practices of liberty and exclu-sion were not separate currents, but rather two sides of the same coin.

However, at crucial moments, social movements sought to imagine freedom withouteither subordination or empire. By the mid-twentieth century, these efforts failed, resulting inthe rise of hierarchical state and corporate institutions. This new framework presented nationaland economic security as society’s guiding commitments and nurtured a continual extension ofAmerica’s global reach. Rana envisions a democratic society that revives settler ideals, but com-bines them with meaningful inclusion for those currently at the margins of American life.

SEPTEMBER | 6 1⁄8 X 9 1⁄4 | 382 PP. | ISBN 978-0-674-04897-3 | $29.95 * (£22.95 UK) | HISTORY / POLITICS

w w w . h u p . h a r v a r d . e d u � h a r v a r d u n i v e r s i t y p r e s s 3 9

AZ IZ RANA

is Assistant

Professor of

Law at

Cornell Law School.

Page 42: Harvard University Press Fall 2010 Catalog

4 0

Reading andWriting in BabylonDominique CharpinTranslated by Jane Marie Todd

Over 5,000 years ago, the history of humanity radically changed direction when writing wasinvented in Sumer, the southern part of present-day Iraq. For the next three millennia, kings,aristocrats, and slaves all made intensive use of cuneiform script to document everything fromroyal archives to family records.

In engaging style, Dominique Charpin shows how hundreds of thousands of claytablets testify to the history of an ancient society that communicated broadly through letters togods, insightful commentary, and sales receipts. He includes a number of passages, offered in

translation, that allow readers an illuminating glimpse into the lives ofBabylonians. Charpin’s insightful overview discusses the methods andinstitutions used to teach reading and writing, the process of appren-ticeship, the role of archives and libraries, and various types of litera-ture, including epistolary exchanges and legal and religious writing.

The only book of its kind, Reading and Writing in Babylonintroduces Mesopotamia as the birthplace of civilization, culture, andliterature while addressing the technical side of writing and arguing fora much wider spread of literacy than is generally assumed. Charpincombines an intimate knowledge of cuneiform with a certain breadthof vision that allows this book to transcend a small circle of scholars.

Though it will engage a broad general audience, this book also fills a critical academic gap andis certain to become the standard reference on the topic.

OCTOBER | 5 1⁄2 X 8 1⁄4 | 46 HALFTONES, 7 LINE ILLUS., 1 MAP | 342 PP. |ISBN 978-0-674-04968-0 | $29.95 * (£22.95 UK) | HISTORY

Votive dog from Sumu-i lu. Beginning of 2nd mil lenium BCE. Louvre, Paris, France.Photo Credit : Réunion des Musées Nationaux / Art Resource, NY

DOMIN IQUE

CHARP IN

is Professor of

Mesopotamian

History at the Sorbonne, Paris.

w w w . h u p . h a r v a r d . e d u � h a r v a r d u n i v e r s i t y p r e s s

Page 43: Harvard University Press Fall 2010 Catalog

LaVita NuovaDante Alighieri

Translated by David R. SlavittIntroduction by Seth Lerer

”GRACEFUL, READABLE, AND JUST—DAVID SLAVITT'S TRANSLATION IS A DELICATE

AND SURPRISING ACHIEVEMENT. THIS IS ANOTHER TRIUMPH FOR SLAVITT, AND A

TREAT FOR THE REST OF US.”

—HENRY TAYLOR

La Vita Nuova (1292–94) has many aspects. Dante’s libello, or“little book,” is most obviously a book about love. In a sequenceof thirty-one poems, the author recounts his love of Beatricefrom his first sight of her (when he was nine and she eight),through unrequited love and chance encounters, to his pro-found grief sixteen years later at her sudden and unexpecteddeath. Linked with Dante’s verse are commentaries on the indi-vidual poems-—their form and meaning—as well as the eventsand feelings from which they originate. Through these com-mentaries the poet comes to see romantic love as the first stepin a spiritual journey that leads to salvation and the capacity fordivine love. He aims to reside with Beatrice among the stars.

David Slavitt gives us a readable and appealing trans-lation of one of the early, defining masterpieces of European lit-erature, animating its verse and prose with a fluid, lively, andengaging idiom and rhythm. His translation makes this firstmajor book of Dante’s stand out as a powerful work of art in its own regard, independent of its“junior” status to La Commedia. In an Introduction, Seth Lerer considers Dante as a poet of civiclife. “Beatrice,” he reminds us, “lives as much on city streets and open congregations as she doesin bedroom fantasies and dreams.”

SEPTEMBER | 4 3⁄8 X 7 1⁄8 | 130 PP. | ISBN 978-0-674-05093-8 | $18.95 * (£14.95 UK) | LITERATURE

w w w . h u p . h a r v a r d . e d u � h a r v a r d u n i v e r s i t y p r e s s 4 1

DAV ID R . SLAV IT T

is a poet and the

translator of more

than ninety works of

fiction, poetry, and

drama. SETH LERER

is Dean of Arts and

Humanities and Distinguished Professor of

Literature at the University of California at

San Diego.

Page 44: Harvard University Press Fall 2010 Catalog

w w w . h u p . h a r v a r d . e d u � h a r v a r d u n i v e r s i t y p r e s s4 2

Desert KingdomHow Oil and Water Forged Modern Saudi Arabia

Toby Craig Jones

Oil and water, and the science and technology used to harness them, have long been at the heartof political authority in Saudi Arabia. Oil’s abundance, and the fantastic wealth it generated, hasbeen a keystone in the political primacy of the kingdom’s ruling family. The other bedrock ele-ment was water, whose importance was measured by its dearth. Over much of the twentiethcentury, it was through efforts to control and manage oil and water that the modern state ofSaudi Arabia emerged.

The central government’s power over water, space, and people expanded steadily overtime, enabled by increasing oil revenues. The operations of the ArabianAmerican Oil Company proved critical to expansion and to achievingpower over the environment. Political authority in Saudi Arabia took shapethrough global networks of oil, science, and expertise. And, where oil andwater were central to the forging of Saudi authoritarianism, they were alsoinstrumental in shaping politics on the ground. Nowhere was the impactmore profound than in the oil-rich Eastern Province, where the politics ofoil and water led to a yearning for national belonging and to calls for rev-olution.

Saudi Arabia is traditionally viewed through the lenses of Islam,tribe, and the economics of oil. Desert Kingdom now provides an alterna-tive history of environmental power and the making of the modern Saudistate. It demonstrates how vital the exploitation of nature and the roles of

science and global experts were to the consolidation of political authority in the desert.

NOVEMBER | 5 1⁄2 X 8 1⁄4 | 292 PP. | ISBN 978-0-674-04985-7 | $29.95 * (£22.95 UK) | HISTORY

TOBY

CRA IG

JONES is

Assistant

Professor of History at Rutgers

University at New Brunswick.

Page 45: Harvard University Press Fall 2010 Catalog

Brain StormThe Flaws in the Science of Sex Differences

Rebecca M. Jordan-Young

Female and male brains are different, thanks to hormones coursing through the brain beforebirth. That’s taught as fact in psychology textbooks, academic journals, and bestselling books.And these hardwired differences explain everything from sexual orientation to gender identity,to why there aren’t more women physicists or more stay-at-home dads.

In this compelling book, Rebecca Jordan-Young takes on the evidence that sex differ-ences are hardwired into the brain. Analyzing virtually all pub-lished research that supports the claims of “human brainorganization theory,” Jordan-Young reveals how often these stud-ies fail the standards of science. Even if careful researchers pointout the limits of their own studies, other researchers and jour-nalists can easily ignore them because brain organization theoryjust sounds so right. But if a series of methodological weaknesses,questionable assumptions, inconsistent definitions, and enormousgaps between ambiguous findings and grand conclusions haveaccumulated through the years, then science isn’t scientific at all.

Elegantly written, this book argues passionately that theanalysis of gender differences deserves far more rigorous, biolog-ically sophisticated science. “The evidence for hormonal sex dif-ferentiation of the human brain better resembles a hodge-podgepile than a solid structure…Once we have cleared the rubble, we can begin to build newer,more scientific stories about human development.”

SEPTEMBER | 6 1⁄8 X 9 1⁄4 | 15 HALFTONES, 3 TABLES | 390 PP. |ISBN 978-0-674-05730-2 | $35.00 * (£25.95 UK) | PSYCHOLOGY

w w w . h u p . h a r v a r d . e d u � h a r v a r d u n i v e r s i t y p r e s s 4 3

REBECCA M.

JORDAN-YOUNG

is a sociomedical

scientist and an

Assistant Professor

of Women’s Studies

at Barnard College, Columbia University.

Page 46: Harvard University Press Fall 2010 Catalog

w w w . h u p . h a r v a r d . e d u � h a r v a r d u n i v e r s i t y p r e s s

TheVulgate BibleVolume I

The PentateuchDouay-Rheims Translation

Edited by Swift Edgar

The Vulgate Bible, compiled and translated in largepart by Saint Jerome at the intersection of the fourthand fifth centuries CE, was used from the earlyMiddleAges through the twentieth centuryin theWestern European Christian (and, later, specifically Catholic) tradition. Its signif-icance can hardly be overstated.The text influenced literature, visual art, music, and edu-cation during theMiddleAges and Renaissance, and its contents lay at the heart of much

of Western theological, intellectual, artistic, andeven political history of that period. At the end ofthe sixteenth century, as a variety of Protestant ver-nacular Bibles became available, professors at aCatholic college first at Douay, then at Rheims,translated theVulgate into English, among other rea-sons to combat the influence of rival theologies.

This volume elegantly and affordably pre-sents the text of the Pentateuch, the first five booksof the Bible, beginning with the creation of theworld and the human race, continuing with the

Great Flood,God’s covenant withAbraham,Israel’s flight from Egypt and wanderingsthrough the wilderness, the laws revealed toMoses, his mustering of the twelve tribes ofIsrael, and ending on the eve of Israel’s intro-duction into the Promised Land.This is thefirst volume of the projected five-volume setof the complete Vulgate Bible.

DUMBARTON OAKS MEDIEVAL LIBRARY 1NOVEMBER | 5 1⁄4 X 8 | 1050 PP. |ISBN 978-0-674-05534-6 | $29.95 * (£19.95 UK) |RELIGION

Announcing

DUMBARTONOAKSMEDIEVAL LIBRARY

TheDumbartonOaksMedieval Libraryis a groundbreaking new facing-pagetranslation series designed tomakewrit-ten achievements of medieval andByzantine culture available to bothscholars and general readers in the Eng-lish-speaking world. It will offer theclassics of the medieval canon as well aslesser-known gems of literary and cul-tural value to a global audience throughaccessiblemodern translations based onthe latest research by lead-ing scholars in the field.

With subjects rangingfrom The Vulgate Bible tothe lives of saints, and gen-res as diverse as travelogues,scientific treatises, and epicand lyric poetry, this newseries will bring a vibrantmedieval world populatedwith saints and sinners,monsters and angels, kingsand slaves, poets and schol-ars, to a new generation ofreaders who will discovercultures and literaturesboth hauntingly familiarand wondrously alien.

In order to do justiceto the scope of themedieval world, the seriescommences with a focus on three lan-guages—Byzantine Greek, MedievalLatin, and Old English—and will incor-porate additional vernacular languagesin the future.

SWIFT EDGAR is a researchassistant at the Dumbarton OaksResearch Library and Collection.

CHRISTOPHER MCDONOUGH isEmeritus Professor of Classics atthe University of Toronto.

R. D. FULK is Chancellor’sProfessor ofEnglish atIndianaUniversity,Bloomington.

4 4

Page 47: Harvard University Press Fall 2010 Catalog

TheArundel Lyrics /The Poems ofHugh PrimasEdited and translated byChristopher McDonough

This volume presents two complementary medieval antholo-gies containing lyrics by two outstanding Latin poets of thesecond half of the twelfth century.The poet Peter of Blois wasproclaimed by a contemporary of his to be amaster composerof rhythmic verse. Peter’s secular love-lyrics gathered in theArundelmanuscript give substance to that claim.Writtenwitha technical virtuosity that rivals the metrical display of Hora-tian lyric, the poems give eloquent and learned expression tothe cult of secular love that emerged in the twelfth century.

The collection is further augmented by verse as variedas Christmas poems and satires on the venality of the RomanCuria and immoral bishops, including a famous lament aboutchurch corruption byWalther of Châtillon.

The cleric Hugh Primas won recognition and fame forcompositions in which he reflects upon his experiences, goodand bad, while traveling around the cities of northern France(such as the important sees of Rheims and Sens) in search of

patronage. Artistic in con-ception and execution, thepoems are memorable forthe witty and often acerbictone with which Primasengages the holders ofecclesiastical power.

DUMBARTON OAKS MEDIEVALLIBRARY 2NOVEMBER | 5 1⁄4 X 8 | 300 PP. |ISBN 978-0-674-05557-5 |$29.95 * (£19.95 UK) | POETRY

The Beowulf ManuscriptEdited and translated byR. D. Fulk

Beowulf is one of the finest works of vernacular literature fromthe EuropeanMiddleAges and as such is a fitting title to headthe Old English family of texts published in the DumbartonOaksMedieval Library.

But this volume offers something unique. For the firsttime in the history of Beowulf scholarship, the poem appearsalongside the other four texts from its sole surviving manu-script: the prose Passion of Saint Christopher, The Wonders of theEast,The Letter ofAlexander the Great toAristotle, and (followingBeowulf‘) the poem Judith. First-time readers as well as estab-lished scholars can now gain new insights into Beowulf—andthe four other texts—by approachingeach in its original context.

Could a fascination with themonstrous have motivated the com-piler of this manuscript, working overa thousand years ago, to pull togetherthis diverse grouping into a single vol-ume? The prose translation by R. D.Fulk, based on the most recent edito-rial understanding, allows readers torediscover Beowulf ’s brilliant masteryalong with otherworldly delights inthe four companion texts in TheBeowulfManuscript.

DUMBARTON OAKS MEDIEVAL LIBRARY 3NOVEMBER | 5 1⁄4 X 8 | 390 PP. |ISBN 978-0-674-05295-6 |$29.95 * (£19.95 UK) | LITERATURE

w w w . h u p . h a r v a r d . e d u � h a r v a r d u n i v e r s i t y p r e s s 4 5

Page 48: Harvard University Press Fall 2010 Catalog

w w w . h u p . h a r v a r d . e d u � h a r v a r d u n i v e r s i t y p r e s s4 6

The GreatWallA Cultural History

Carlos Rojas

Carlos Rojas presents a sweeping survey of the historical and political significance of oneof the world’s most recognizable monuments. Although the splendor of the Great Wallhas become virtually synonymous with its vast size, the structure’s conceptual coherenceis actually grounded on the tenuous and ephemeral stories we tell about it. These sto-ries give life to the Wall and help secure its hold on our collective imagination, while atthe same time permitting it to constantly reinvent itself in accordance with the needs of

each new era.

Through an examination of allusions to the Wall in aneclectic array of texts—ranging from official dynastic histories,elite poetry, and popular folktales, to contemporary tourist testi-monials, children’s songs, and avant-garde performance art—this study maps out a provocative new framework forunderstanding the structure’s function and significance.

This volume approaches the Wall through the storieswe tell and contends that it is precisely in this cultural historythat we may find the Wall’s true meaning, together with thesecret of its greatness.

DECEMBER | 5 1⁄2 X 8 1⁄4 | 17 HALFTONES, 6 MAPS | 216 PP. |ISBN 978-0-674-04787-7 | $24.95 * (£18.95 UK) | HISTORY / TRAVEL

Chinae, Olim Sinarum Regionis, Nova Descript io: Auctore Ludouico Georgio by Abraham Ortel ius and LuisJorge de Barbuda (1584). The Hong Kong University of Science and Technology.

CARLOS ROJAS

is Assistant

Professor of

Chinese Cultural

Studies at Duke University.

Page 49: Harvard University Press Fall 2010 Catalog

Near AndersonvilleWinslow Homer’s Civil War

Peter H. Wood

The admired American painter Winslow Homer rose to national attention during the Civil War.But one of his most important early images remained unknown for a century. The renownedartist is best known for depicting ships and sailors, hunters and fishermen, rural vignettes andcoastal scenes. Yet he also created some of the first serious black figures in American art. NearAndersonville (1865–66) is the earliest and least known of these impressive images.

Peter Wood, a leading expert on Homer’s images of blacks,reveals the long-hidden story of this remarkable Civil War painting.His brisk narrative locates the picture in southwest Georgia inAugust 1864 and provides its military and political context. Woodunderscores the agony of the Andersonville prison camp and high-lights a huge but little-known cavalry foray ordered by General Sher-man as he laid siege to Atlanta. Homer’s image takes viewers“behind enemy lines” to consider the utter failure of “Stoneman’sRaid” from the perspective of an enslaved black Southerner.

By examining the interplay of symbolic elements, Woodreveals a picture pregnant with meaning. He links it to AbrahamLincoln’s presidential campaign of 1864 and underscores the enduring importance of Homer’sthoughtful black woman. The painter adopted a bottom-up perspective on slavery and emanci-pation that most scholars needed another century to discover. By integrating art and history,Wood’s provocative study gives us a fresh vantage point on Homer’s early career, the struggleto end slavery, and the dramatic closing years of the Civil War.

THE NATHAN I. HUGGINS LECTURES |NOVEMBER | 5 1⁄2 X 8 1⁄4 | 8 COLOR ILLUS., 16 HALFTONES | 132 PP. |ISBN 978-0-674-05320-5 | $18.95 * (£14.95 UK) |HISTORY / ART

w w w . h u p . h a r v a r d . e d u � h a r v a r d u n i v e r s i t y p r e s s 4 7

PETER H . WOOD

is Professor

Emeritus of

History at Duke

University.

Page 50: Harvard University Press Fall 2010 Catalog

w w w . h u p . h a r v a r d . e d u � h a r v a r d u n i v e r s i t y p r e s s4 8

The HungryWorldAmerica’s Cold War Battle against Poverty in Asia

Nick Cullather

“CULLATHER HAS WRITTEN AN EPIC STORY THAT IS ESSENTIAL READING FOR ANYONE

WHO CARES ABOUT THE HISTORY—AND FUTURE—OF GLOBAL POVERTY.”

—MATTHEW CONNELLY, AUTHOR OF FATAL MISCONCEPTION: THE STRUGGLE TO

CONTROL WORLD POPULATION

Food was a critical front in the Cold War battle for Asia. “Where Communism goes, hunger fol-lows” was the slogan of American nation builders who fanned out into the countryside to divert

rivers, remodel villages, and introduce tractors, chemicals, and genes tomultiply the crops consumed by millions. This “green revolution” hasbeen credited with averting Malthusian famines, saving billions of lives,and jump-starting Asia’s economic revival. Bono and Bill Gates hail itas a model for revitalizing Africa’s economy. But this tale of science tri-umphant conceals a half century of political struggle from the Afghanhighlands to the rice paddies of the Mekong Delta, a campaign to trans-form rural societies by changing the way people eat and grow food.

The ambition to lead Asia into an age of plenty grew along-side development theories that targeted hunger as a root cause of war.Scientific agriculture was an instrument for molding peasants into citi-zens with modern attitudes, loyalties, and reproductive habits. But food

policies were as contested then as they are today. While Kennedy and Johnson envisionedKansas-style agribusiness guarded by strategic hamlets, Indira Gandhi, Marcos, and Suhartoinscribed their own visions of progress onto the land.

Out of this campaign, the costliest and most sustained effort for development everundertaken, emerged the struggles for resources and identity that define the region today. AsObama revives the lost arts of Keynesianism and counter-insurgency, the history of these colos-sal projects reveals bitter and important lessons for today’s missions to feed a hungry world.

DECEMBER | 6 1⁄8 X 9 1⁄4 | 9 HALFTONES, 1 MAP | 326 PP. |ISBN 978-0-674-05078-5 | $35.00 * (£25.95 UK) | HISTORY

N ICK

CULLATHER

is Associate

Professor of

History at Indiana University.

Page 51: Harvard University Press Fall 2010 Catalog

Reshaping theWork-Family DebateWhy Men and Class Matter

Joan C. Williams

“AT LAST, A BOOK THAT LEAPS PAST THE CURRENT WORK-FAMILY DEBATE. IT IS TIME

TO FREE WOMEN AND MEN TO NURTURE THEIR CHILDREN AND SUPPORT THEIR

FAMILIES. BRILLIANT!”

—JOAN BLADES, CO-FOUNDER OF MOVEON.ORG AND

MOMSRISING.ORG

The United States has the most family-hostile public policy in the devel-oped world. Despite what is often reported, new mothers don’t “optout” of work. They are pushed out by discriminating and inflexibleworkplaces. Today’s workplaces continue to idealize the worker whohas someone other than parents caring for their children.

Conventional wisdom attributes women’s decision to leavework to their maternal traits and desires. In this thought-provokingbook, Joan Williams shows why that view is misguided and how work-place practice disadvantages men—both those who seek to avoid thebreadwinner role and those who embrace it—as well as women. Facedwith masculine norms that define the workplace, women must playthe tomboy or the femme. Both paths result in a gender bias that isexacerbated when the two groups end up pitted against each other.And although work-family issues long have been seen strictly througha gender lens, we ignore class at our peril. The dysfunctional relation-ship between the professional-managerial class and the white working class must be addressedbefore real reform can take root.

Contesting the idea that women need to negotiate better within the family, and redefin-ing the notion of success in the workplace, Williams reinvigorates the work-family debate andoffers the first steps to making life manageable for all American families.

THEWILLIAM E. MASSEY SR. LECTURES IN THE HISTORY OF AMERICAN CIVILIZATION |OCTOBER | 6 1⁄8 X 9 1⁄4 | 2 GRAPHS | 288 PP. | ISBN 978-0-674-05567-4 | $29.95 * (£22.95 UK) |SOCIOLOGY

w w w . h u p . h a r v a r d . e d u � h a r v a r d u n i v e r s i t y p r e s s 4 9

JOAN C .

W ILL IAMS

is Distinguished

Professor of

Law, 1066

Foundation

Chair, and founding Director of the

Center for WorkLife Law at the University

of California, Hastings College of the Law.

She is the author of Unbending Gender.

Page 52: Harvard University Press Fall 2010 Catalog

w w w . h u p . h a r v a r d . e d u � h a r v a r d u n i v e r s i t y p r e s s5 0

Latin America’s ColdWarHal Brands

For Latin America, the Cold War was anything but cold. Nor was it the so-called “long peace”afforded the world’s superpowers by their nuclear standoff. In this book, the first to take aninternational perspective on the postwar decades in the region, Hal Brands sets out to explainwhat exactly happened in Latin America during the Cold War, and why it was so traumatic.

Tracing the tumultuous course of regional affairs from the late 1940s through the early1990s, Latin America’s Cold War delves into the myriad crises and turning points of theperiod—the Cuban revolution and its aftermath; the recurring cycles of insurgency and counter-insurgency; the emergence of currents like the National Security Doctrine, liberation theology,

and dependency theory; the rise and demise of a hemispheric diplomaticchallenge to U.S. hegemony in the 1970s; the conflagration that engulfedCentral America from the Nicaraguan revolution onward; and the dem-ocratic and economic reforms of the 1980s.

Most important, the book chronicles these events in a way thatis both multinational and multilayered, weaving the experiences of adiverse cast of characters into an understanding of how global, regional,and local influences interacted to shape Cold War crises in Latin Amer-ica. Ultimately, Brands exposes Latin America’s Cold War as not a singleconflict, but rather a series of overlapping political, social, geostrategic,and ideological struggles whose repercussions can be felt to this day.

SEPTEMBER | 6 1⁄8 X 9 1⁄4 | 17 HALFTONES | 326 PP. |ISBN 978-0-674-05528-5 | $29.95 * (£22.95 UK) | HISTORY

HAL

BRANDS is

Senior Analyst

at the

Institute for Defense Analyses

and the author of From Berlin to

Baghdad: America’s Search for

Purpose in the Post–Cold War

World.

Page 53: Harvard University Press Fall 2010 Catalog

God-Fearing and FreeA Spiritual History of America’s Cold War

Jason W. Stevens

“THOROUGH AND CONVINCING . . . LUCID AND URGENT . . . STEVENS’S BOOK

SHOWS US JUST HOW IMPORTANT WERE THE POPULAR ELEMENTS OF

FUNDAMENTALIST CHRISTIANITY DURING THE COLD WAR AND SETS ASIDE AS

RELATIVELY UNIMPORTANT THE RE-ALLURING INTELLECTUAL TRAGIC IRONIST,REINHOLD NIEBUHR.”

—PAUL A. BOVÉ, UNIVERSITY OF PITTSBURGH

Religion has been on the rise in America for decades—which strikesmany as a shocking new development. To the contrary, JasonStevens asserts, the rumors of the death of God were premature.Americans have always conducted their cultural life through reli-gious symbols, never more so than during the Cold War. In God-Fearing and Free, Stevens discloses how the nation, on top of theworld and torn between grandiose self-congratulation and doubtabout the future, opened the way for a new master narrative. Thebook shows how the American public, powered by a national reli-gious revival, was purposefully disillusioned regarding the country’smythical innocence and fortified for an epochal struggle with totalitarianism.

Stevens reveals how the Augustinian doctrine of original sin was refurbished and thenmobilized in a variety of cultural discourses that aimed to shore up democratic society againstthreats preying on the nation’s internal weaknesses. Suddenly, innocence no longer meant aclear conscience. Instead it became synonymous with totalitarian ideologies of the fascist rightor the communist left, whose notions of perfectability were dangerously close to millenarianideals at the heart of American Protestant tradition. As America became riddled with self-doubt,ruminations on the meaning of power and the future of the globe during the “American Cen-tury” renewed the impetus to religion.

Covering a wide selection of narrative and cultural forms, Stevens shows how writers,artists, and intellectuals, the devout as well as the nonreligious, disseminated the terms of thiscultural dialogue, disputing, refining, and challenging it—effectively making the conservativecase against modernity as liberals floundered.

NOVEMBER | 6 1⁄8 X 9 1⁄4 | 424 PP. | ISBN 978-0-674-05555-1 | $39.95 * (£29.95 UK) | HISTORY

w w w . h u p . h a r v a r d . e d u � h a r v a r d u n i v e r s i t y p r e s s 5 1

JASON W.

STEVENS is

Assistant Professor

of English, Harvard

University.

Page 54: Harvard University Press Fall 2010 Catalog

w w w . h u p . h a r v a r d . e d u � h a r v a r d u n i v e r s i t y p r e s s5 2

Wagner and theErotic ImpulseLaurence Dreyfus

Though his image is tarnished today by unrepentant anti-Semitism, Richard Wagner(1813–1883) was better known in the nineteenth century for his provocative musicaleroticism. In this illuminating study of the composer and his works, Laurence Dreyfusshows howWagner’s obsession with sexuality prefigured the composition of operas suchas Tannhäuser, Die Walküre, Tristan und Isolde and Parsifal. Daring to represent erotic

stimulation, passionate ecstasy, and the torment of sexualdesire, Wagner sparked intense reactions from figures likeBaudelaire, Clara Schumann, Nietzsche, and Nordau,whose verbal tributes and censures disclose what wastransmitted when music represented sex.

Wagner himself saw the cultivation of an erotichigh style as central to his art, especially after devising ananti-philosophical response to Schopenhauer’s “meta-physics of sexual love.” A reluctant eroticist, Wagnermasked his personal compulsion to cross-dress in pinksatin and drench himself in rose perfumes while simulta-neously incorporating his silk fetish and love of floralscents into his librettos. His affection for dominant femalesand surprising regard for homosexual love likewise enable

some striking portraits in his operas. In the end, Wagner’s achievement was to have fash-ioned an oeuvre which explored his sexual yearnings as much as it conveyed—as neverbefore—how music could act on erotic impulse.

DECEMBER | 6 1⁄8 X 9 1⁄4 | 1 LINE ILLUS., 11 MUSIC EXAMPLES | 238 PP. |ISBN 978-0-674-01881-5 | $27.95 * (£19.95 UK) |MUSIC

LAURENCE DREYFUS

is Professor of Music at

Oxford University and a

Fellow of Magdalen

College. He is the author of Bach’s

Continuo Group and Bach and the Patterns

of Invention (both from Harvard).

Page 55: Harvard University Press Fall 2010 Catalog

WhatWas African AmericanLiterature?Kenneth W. Warren

African American literature is over. With this provocative claim Kenneth Warren sets out toidentify a distinctly African American literature—and to change the terms with which we dis-cuss it.

Rather than contest other definitions, Warren makes a clear and compelling case forunderstanding African American literature as creative and critical workwritten by black Americans within and against the strictures of JimCrow America. Within these parameters, his book outlines protocols ofreading that best make sense of the literary works produced by AfricanAmerican writers and critics over the first two-thirds of the twentiethcentury.

In Warren’s view, African American literature begged the ques-tion: what would happen to this literature if and when Jim Crow wasfinally overthrown? Thus, imagining a world without African Ameri-can literature was essential to that literature. In support of this point,Warren focuses on three moments in the history of Phylon, an impor-tant journal of African American culture. In the dialogues Phylon doc-uments, the question of whether race would disappear as an organizingliterary category emerges as shared ground for critical and literary prac-tice. Warren also points out that while scholarship by black Americanshas always been the province of a petit bourgeois elite, the strictures of Jim Crow enlisted thesewriters in a politics that served the race as a whole.

Finally, Warren’s work sheds light on the current moment in which advocates ofAfrican American solidarity insist on a past that is more productively put behind us.

THEW. E. B. DU BOIS LECTURES | JANUARY | 5 1⁄2 X 8 1⁄4 | 192 PP. |ISBN 978-0-674-04922-2 | $22.95 * (£16.95 UK) |LITERATURE / AFRICAN AMERICAN STUDIES

w w w . h u p . h a r v a r d . e d u � h a r v a r d u n i v e r s i t y p r e s s 5 3

KENNETH W.

WARREN is

Fairfax M. Cone

Distinguished

Service

Professor of

English at the University of

Chicago.

Page 56: Harvard University Press Fall 2010 Catalog

w w w . h u p . h a r v a r d . e d u � h a r v a r d u n i v e r s i t y p r e s s5 4

The SameThing Over and OverHow School Reformers Get Stuck in Yesterday’s Ideas

Frederick M. Hess

In this genial and challenging overview of endless debates over school reform, Rick Hess showsthat even bitter opponents in debates about how to improve schools agree on much more thanthey realize—and that much of it must change radically. Cutting through the tangled thicketsof right, and left-wing dogma, he clears the ground for transformation of the American schoolsystem.

Whatever they think of school vouchers or charter schools, teacher merit pay or bilin-gual education, most educators and advocates take many other things for granted. The one-

teacher–one-classroom model. The professional full-timeteacher. Students grouped in age-defined grades. The nine-month calendar. Top-down local district control. All wereinnovative and exciting—in the nineteenth century. AsHess shows, the system hasn’t changed since most Ameri-cans lived on farms and in villages, since school taught youto read, write, and do arithmetic, and since only an elitewent to high school, let alone college.

Arguing that a fundamentally nineteenth centurysystem can’t be right for a twenty-first century world, Hesssuggests that uniformity gets in the way of quality, andurges us to create a much wider variety of schools, to meeta greater range of needs for different kinds of talents,needed by a vastly more complex and demanding society.

NOVEMBER | 5 1⁄2 X 8 1⁄4 | 282 PP. | ISBN 978-0-674-05582-7 | $27.95 * (£20.95 UK) | EDUCATION

FREDER ICK M . HESS is

Resident Scholar and

Director of Education

Policy Initiatives at the

American Enterprise Institute and executive

editor of Education Next.

Page 57: Harvard University Press Fall 2010 Catalog

Someone Has to FailThe Zero-Sum Game of Public Schooling

David F. Labaree

What do we really want from schools? Only everything, in all its contradictions. Most of all, wewant access and opportunity for all children—but all possible advantages for our own. So argueshistorian David Labaree in this provocative look at the way “this archetype of dysfunction worksso well at what we want it to do even as it evades what we explicitly ask it to do.”

Ever since the common school movement of the nineteenth century, mass schoolinghas been seen as an essential solution to great social problems. Yetas wave after wave of reform movements have shown, schools areextremely difficult to change. Labaree shows how the very organi-zation of the locally controlled, administratively limited school sys-tem makes reform difficult.

At the same time, he argues, the choices of educationalconsumers have always overwhelmed top-down efforts at schoolreform. Individual families seek to use schools for their own pur-poses—to pursue social opportunity, if they need it, and to preservesocial advantage, if they have it. In principle, we want the best forall children. In practice, we want the best for our own.

Provocative, unflinching, wry, Someone Has to Fail looksat the way that unintended consequences of consumer choices havecreated an extraordinarily resilient educational system, perpetuallyexpanding, perpetually unequal, constantly being reformed, andnever changing much.

NOVEMBER | 5 1⁄2 X 8 1⁄4 | 284 PP. | ISBN 978-0-674-05068-6 | $29.95 * (£22.95 UK) | EDUCATION

w w w . h u p . h a r v a r d . e d u � h a r v a r d u n i v e r s i t y p r e s s 5 5

DAV ID F.

LABAREE

is Professor of

Education at

Stanford

University and

author of How to Succeed in School

Without Really Learning.

Page 58: Harvard University Press Fall 2010 Catalog

w w w . h u p . h a r v a r d . e d u � h a r v a r d u n i v e r s i t y p r e s s5 6

Promotion and TenureConfidentialDavid D. Perlmutter

“Sitting down with a young and brilliant mathematician, I asked what he thought were hisbiggest problems in working toward tenure. Instead of describing difficulties with his equationsor his software programs, he lamented that (a) his graduate assistant wasn’t completing his taskson time, (b) his department chair didn’t seem to care if junior faculty obtained grants, and(c) a senior professor kept glaring at him in faculty meetings. He knew he could handle theintellectual side of being an academic—but what about the people side? ‘Why didn’t they offer

“Being a Professor 101” in graduate school?’ he wondered.”

Promotion and Tenure Confidential provides that coursein an astute and practical book, which shows that P&T is not justabout research, teaching, and service but also about human rela-tions and political good sense. Drawing on research and extensiveinterviews with junior and senior faculty across many institutions,David D. Perlmutter provides clear-sighted guidance on planningand managing an academic career, from graduate school to tenureand beyond.

TOPICS INCLUDE

� making the transformation from student and protégé to teacherand mentor

� seeking out and holding onto lifelong allies

� how to manage your online reputation and avoid “death byGoogle”

� what to say and what not to say to deans and department chairs

� how meeting deadlines wins points with everyone in your life

� how, when, and to whom to say “no”

� when and how to look for a new job when you have a job

� how (and whom) to ask for letters of recommendation

� what to do if you know you’re not going to get tenure

NOVEMBER | 5 1⁄2 X 8 1⁄4 | 1 TABLE | 224 PP. | ISBN 978-0-674-04878-2 | $24.95 * (£18.95 UK) | EDUCATION

DAV ID D.

PERLMUTTER is

Director of the

School of

Journalism and Mass Communication and a

Professor and Starch Faculty Fellow at the

University of Iowa. He writes the “P&T

Confidential” column for the Chronicle of

Higher Education.

Page 59: Harvard University Press Fall 2010 Catalog

The Illusion of Free MarketsPunishment and the Myth of Natural Order

Bernard E. Harcourt

“BERNARD HARCOURT HAS NEVER HAD AN UNINTERESTING THOUGHT, OR MADE AN

ARGUMENT THAT DOES NOT PROVOKE OR ENGAGE OR DELIGHT OR ENLIGHTEN—OR

DO ALL OF THOSE THINGS SIMULTANEOUSLY.”

—MALCOLM GLADWELL

It is widely believed today that the free market is the best mechanismever invented to efficiently allocate resources in society. Just as funda-mental as faith in the free market is the belief that government has alegitimate and competent role in policing and the punishment arena.This curious incendiary combination of free market efficiency and the BigBrother state has become seemingly obvious, but it hinges on the illusionof a supposedly natural order in the economic realm. The Illusion ofFree Markets argues that our faith in “free markets” has severely dis-torted American politics and punishment practices.

Bernard Harcourt traces the birth of the idea of natural orderto eighteenth-century economic thought and reveals its gradual evolu-tion through the Chicago School of economics and ultimately intotoday’s myth of the free market. The modern category of “liberty”emerged in reaction to an earlier, integrated vision of punishment andpublic economy, known in the eighteenth century as “police.” Thisdevelopment shaped the dominant belief today that competitive markets are inherently effi-cient and should be sharply demarcated from a government-run penal sphere.

This modern vision rests on a simple but devastating illusion. Superimposing thepolitical categories of “freedom” or “discipline” on forms of market organization has the unfor-tunate effect of obscuring rather than enlightening. It obscures by making both the free marketand the prison system seem natural and necessary. In the process, it facilitated the birth of thepenitentiary system in the nineteenth century and its ultimate culmination into mass incarcer-ation today.

JANUARY | 6 1⁄8 X 9 1⁄4 | 7 TABLES, 12 GRAPHS | 264 PP. | ISBN 978-0-674-05726-5 | $29.95 * (£22.95 UK) |ECONOMICS / SOCIOLOGY

w w w . h u p . h a r v a r d . e d u � h a r v a r d u n i v e r s i t y p r e s s 5 7

BERNARD E .

HARCOURT

is Julius

Kreeger

Professor of

Law and

Professor of Political Science at

The University of Chicago.

Page 60: Harvard University Press Fall 2010 Catalog

w w w . h u p . h a r v a r d . e d u � h a r v a r d u n i v e r s i t y p r e s s5 8

Genealogy of thePagan GodsVolume 1: Books I–V

Giovanni BoccaccioEdited and translated by Jon Solomon

Giovanni Boccaccio’s Genealogy of the Pagan Gods is an ambitious work of humanistic scholarship whose

goal is to plunder ancient and medieval literary sources so as to create a massive synthesis of Greek and

Roman mythology. The work also contains a famous defense of the value of studying ancient pagan

poetry in a Christian world.

The complete work in fifteen books contains a meticulously organized genealogical tree iden-

tifying approximately 950 Greco-Roman mythological figures. The scope is enormous: 723 chapters

include over a thousand citations from two hundred Greek, Roman,

medieval, and Trecento authors. Throughout the Genealogy, Boccaccio

deploys an array of allegorical, historical, and philological critiques of the

ancient myths and their iconography.

Much more than a mere compilation of pagan myths, the

Genealogy incorporates hundreds of excerpts from and comments on

ancient poetry, illustrative of the new spirit of philological and cultural

inquiry emerging in the early Renaissance. It is at once the most ambi-

tious work of literary scholarship of the early Renaissance and a demon-

stration to contemporaries of the moral and cultural value of studying

ancient poetry. This is the first volume of the projected three-volume set

of Boccaccio’s complete Genealogy.

THE I TATTI RENAISSANCE LIBRARY 46JANUARY | 5 1⁄4 X 8 | 5 HALFTONES | 630 PP. | ISBN 978-0-674-05710-4 |$29.95 * (£19.95 UK) | LITERATURE

JON SOLOMON

is Robert D.Novak Professor of Western Civilization& Culture and Professor of the Classicsand of Cinema Studies, University ofIllinois at Urbana-Champaign.

GARY R . GRUND is Professor of EnglishLiterature, Rhode Island College.

BRIAN P. COPENHAVER is Professor ofHistory and Philosophy and Provost atUCLA. LODI NAUTA is Professor in theHistory of Philosophy, University ofGroningen, the Netherlands.

Page 61: Harvard University Press Fall 2010 Catalog

Humanist TragediesTranslated by Gary R. Grund

Humanist Tragedies, like its companion volume Humanist Comedies (ITRL

19), contains a representative sampling of Latin drama written during the

Tre- and Quattrocento. The five tragedies included in this volume—

Albertino Mussato’s Ecerinis (1314), Antonio Loschi’s Achilleis (ca. 1387),

Gregorio Corraro’s Progne (ca. 1429), LeonardoDati’sHyempsal (ca. 1442),

andMarcellinoVerardi’s Fernandus servatus (1493)—were nourished by a

potent amalgam of classical, medieval, and pre-humanist sources.

Just as Latin humanist comedy depended heavily upon Plautus

and Terence, humanist tragedy drew its inspiration primarily from the

nine plays of Seneca. Dramatists also used ancient legends or contempo-

rary history as source material, dramatizing them as Seneca might have

done. Some even attempted to outdo Seneca, exaggerating the bloody sen-

sationalism, the bombastic rhetoric, and the insistence on retributive jus-

tice for which he was famous.

Unlike comedy, which drew its narratives from ordinary life and

from love, sex, money, and manners, tragedy was not concerned with

human foibles but with distant tragic heroes.The impossible choices faced

by larger-than-life men and women whose heroic destinies hung in the

balance gave tragedy a considerably shorter shelf-life than comedies.While

comedy stayed relevant, tragedy became problematic, evolving into the

hybrid genre of tragicomedy by the end of the Quattrocento. Humanist

tragedy testifies to the momentous changes in literary and cultural con-

ventions that occurred during the Renaissance.

THE I TATTI RENAISSANCE LIBRARY 45JANUARY | 5 1⁄4 X 8 | 350 PP. | ISBN 978-0-674-05725-8 |$29.95 * (£19.95 UK) | DRAMA

Dialectical DisputationsLorenzo VallaEdited and translated byBrian P. Copenhaver and Lodi Nauta

Lorenzo Valla (1407–1457) ranks among the greatest scholars and

thinkers of the Renaissance. He has secured lasting fame for his brilliant

critical skills,most famously displayed in his exposure of the“Donation of

Constantine,” the forged document upon which the papacy based its

claims to political power. Less well known in the English-speaking world

is Valla’s work in the philosophy of language, the basis of his reputation

as the greatest philosopher of the humanist movement.TheDialectical Dis-

putations, translated here for the first time into any modern language, is

his principal contribution to the philosophy of language and logic.A sav-

age attack on the scholastic tradition of Aristotelian logic,Valla sought to

replace that tradition with a new logic based on the actual historical usage

of classical Latin and on a commonsense approach to semantics and argu-

ment. Valla’s goal was to provide a logic that could be used by lawyers,

preachers, statesmen and others who needed to succeed in public debate;

a logic that was both stylistically correct and rhetorically elegant; and thus

a logic which could dispense with the technical language of the scholas-

tics, that “tribe of Peripatetics, perverters of natural meanings.” Valla’s

reformed dialectic became a milestone in the development of humanist

logic and contained startling anticipations of certain modern theories of

semantics and language.

THE I TATTI RENAISSANCE LIBRARY 47JANUARY | 5 1⁄4 X 8 | 672 PP. | ISBN 978-0-674-05576-6 |$29.95 * (£19.95 UK) | PHILOSOPHY

w w w . h u p . h a r v a r d . e d u � h a r v a r d u n i v e r s i t y p r e s s 5 9

James Hankins, General Editor

THE I TATTI RENAISSANCE LIBRARY

Page 62: Harvard University Press Fall 2010 Catalog

w w w . h u p . h a r v a r d . e d u � h a r v a r d u n i v e r s i t y p r e s s6 0

The Great Heart ofthe RepublicSt. Louis and the Cultural Civil War

Adam Arenson

“AN AMBITIOUS, INNOVATIVE, AND ENGAGING LOOK AT THE PIVOTAL ROLE

ST. LOUIS PLAYED IN THE CULTURAL CONTEST TO DETERMINE THE DESTINY OF

THE UNITED STATES.”

—STEPHEN ARON, UCLA

The Civil War revealed what united as well as what divided Amer-icans in the nineteenth century—not only in its deadly military con-flict, but also in the broader battle of ideas, dueling moral systems,and competing national visions that preceded and followed. Thiscultural civil war was the clash among North, South, and West, astheir leaders sought to shape Manifest Destiny and slavery politics.

No site embodied this struggle more completely than St.Louis, the largest city along the border of slavery and freedom. Inthis sweeping history, Adam Arenson reveals a city at the heart ofthe cultural civil war. St. Louisans heralded a new future, erasing oldpatterns as the United States stretched across the continent. Theytried to reorient the nation’s political landscape, with westerners in

the vanguard and St. Louis as the cultural, commercial, and national capital. John C.Calhoun, Frederick Douglass, Walt Whitman, and John Brown tracked the progress ofthe cultural contest by monitoring events in St. Louis, observing how the city’s leaderstried yet ultimately failed to control the national destiny.

The interplay of local ambitions and national meanings reveals the wider cul-tural transformation brought about by westward expansion, political strife, and eman-cipation in the era of the Civil War and Reconstruction. This vibrant and beautifullywritten story enriches our understanding of America at a crossroads.

JANUARY | 6 1⁄8 X 9 1⁄4 | 22 HALFTONES, 2 MAPS | 320 PP. | ISBN 978-0-674-05288-8 |$35.00 * (£25.95 UK) | HISTORY

ADAM

ARENSON

is Assistant

Professor of

History at the University of Texas

at El Paso.

Page 63: Harvard University Press Fall 2010 Catalog

Sublime Dreams ofLiving MachinesThe Automaton in the European Imagination

Minsoo Kang

From the dawn of European civilization to the twentieth century, the automaton—bet-ter known today as the robot—has captured the Western imagination and provided avital lens into the nature of humanity.

Historian Minsoo Kang argues that to properly understand thehuman-as-machine and the human-as-fundamentally-different-from-machine, we must trace the origins of these ideas and examine howthey were transformed by intellectual, cultural, and artistic appear-ances of the automaton throughout the history of the West. Kangtracks the first appearance of the automaton in ancient mythsthrough the medieval and Renaissance periods, marks the prolifer-ation of the automaton as a central intellectual concept in the Sci-entific Revolution and the subsequent backlash during theEnlightenment, and details appearances in Romantic literature andthe introduction of the living machine in the Industrial Age. He con-cludes with a reflection on the destructive confrontation betweenhumanity and machinery in the modern era and the reverberations of the humanity-machinery theme today.

Sublime Dreams of Living Machines is an ambitious historical exploration and, atheart, an attempt to fully elucidate the rich and varied ways we have utilized our mostuncanny creations to explore essential questions about ourselves.

FEBRUARY | 6 1⁄8 X 9 1⁄4 | 20 HALFTONES, 3 TABLES | 358 PP. |ISBN 978-0-674-04935-2 | $39.95X (£29.95 UK) | HISTORY

Photo by Mia Ulmer / www.birchtreestudiostl .com; Hero of Alexandria, design for an automaton theater

w w w . h u p . h a r v a r d . e d u � h a r v a r d u n i v e r s i t y p r e s s 6 1

MINSOO

KANG is Associate

Professor of History at

the University of

Missouri–St. Louis.

h u m a n i t i e s

Page 64: Harvard University Press Fall 2010 Catalog

w w w . h u p . h a r v a r d . e d u � h a r v a r d u n i v e r s i t y p r e s s6 2

The Arc of the MoralUniverse and OtherEssaysJoshua Cohen

In this collection of essays, Joshua Cohen locates ideas aboutdemocracy in three far-ranging contexts. First, he explores therelationship between democratic values and history. He then dis-cusses democracy in connection with the views of defining polit-ical theorists in the democratic tradition: John Locke, JohnRawls, Noam Chomsky, Juergen Habermas, and Susan MollerOkin. Finally, he examines the place of democratic ideals in aglobal setting, suggesting an idea of “global public reason”—aterrain of political justification in global politics in which sharedreason still plays an essential role.

All the essays are linked by his overarching claim that polit-ical philosophy is a practical subject intended to orient and guideconduct in the social world. Cohen integrates moral, social-scientific, and historical argument in order to develop thisstance, and he further confronts the question of whether a soci-ety conceived in liberty and dedicated to equality can endure. AtGettysburg, President Lincoln forcefully stated the question andexpressed both hope and concern over this same struggle aboutan affirmative answer. By enabling us to trace the arc of themoral universe, the essays in this volume—along with the com-panion collection on Philosophy, Politics, Democracy—give ussome reasons for sharing that hope.

JOSHUA COHEN i s Mar ta Sutton Weeks Professor ofEth i c s in Soc iety at S tanford Univers i t y and ed i tor ofB o s t o n R e v i e w.

JANUARY | 6 1⁄8 X 9 1⁄4 | 390 PP. | ISBN 978-0-674-05560-5 |$39.95X (£29.95 UK) | PHILOSOPHY

Our SouthGeographic Fantasy and the Rise ofNational Literature

Jennifer Rae Greeson

Since the birth of the nation, we have turned to stories about theAmerican South to narrate the rapid ascendency of the UnitedStates on the world stage. The idea of a cohesive South, differ-ent from yet integral to the United States, arose with the veryformation of the nation itself. Its semitropical climate, planta-tion production, and heterogeneous population once defined theNewWorld from the perspective of Europe. By founding U.S. lit-erature through opposition to the South, writers boldly assertedtheir nation to stand apart from the imperial world order.

Our South tracks the nation/South juxtaposition in U.S.literature from the founding to the turn of the twentieth cen-tury, through genres including travel writing, gothic andromance novels, geography textbooks, transcendentalist prose,and abolitionist address. Even as the southern states becameperipheral to U.S. politics and economy, Jennifer Rae Greesondemonstrates that in literature the South remained central tothe expanding and evolving idea of the nation.

Claiming the South as our deviant and recalcitrant “other,”Americans have projected an anti-imperial imperative of domes-ticating and civilizing, administering and integrating underde-veloped regions both within our borders and beyond.Our Southhas been a primal site for thinking about geography and powerin the United States.

J ENN IFER RAE GREESON i s A ss i s tant Professor ofAmer i c an L i te rature at the Univers i t y of Vi rg in ia .

OCTOBER | 6 1⁄8 X 9 1⁄4 | 18 HALFTONES, 3 MAPS | 352 PP. |ISBN 978-0-674-02428-1 | $39.95X (£29.95 UK) |LITERATURE / AFRICAN AMERICAN STUDIES

Page 65: Harvard University Press Fall 2010 Catalog

Do Metaphors Dreamof Literal Sleep?A Science-Fictional Theor y of Representation

Seo-Young Chu

In culture and scholarship, science-fictional worlds are perceivedas unrealistic and altogether imaginary. Seo-Young Chu offers abold challenge to this perception of the genre, arguing insteadthat science fiction is a form of “high-intensity realism” capableof representing non-imaginary objects that elude more tradi-tional, “realist” modes of representation. Powered by lyric forcesthat allow it to transcend the dichotomy between the literal andthe figurative, science fiction has the capacity to accommodateobjects of representation that are themselves neither entirely fig-urative nor entirely literal in nature. Chu explores the global-ized world, cyberspace, war trauma, the Korean concept of han,and the rights of robots, all as referents for which she locatesscience-fictional representations in poems, novels, music, films,visual pieces, and other works ranging within and without pre-vious demarcations of the science fiction genre. In showing thedivide between realism and science fiction to be illusory, DoMetaphors Dream of Literal Sleep? sheds new light on the valueof science fiction as an aesthetic and philosophical resource—one that matters more and more as our everyday realities growincreasingly resistant to straightforward representation.

SEO -YOUNG CHU i s A ss i s tant Professor of Eng l i shat Queens Co l lege, C i ty Un iver s i t y of New York .

JANUARY | 6 1⁄8 X 9 1⁄4 | 276 PP. | ISBN 978-0-674-05517-9 |$39.95X (£29.95 UK) | LITERATURE / SCIENCE FICTION

“Self-Portrait,” by Lu Zhuangzhang, in A Primer at a Glance: Chinese NewPhonetic Script in the Amoy Dialect (Yimu liaoran chujie: Zhongguo qieyinxinzi Xia qiang), 1892.

Sound and Script inChinese DiasporaJing Tsu

“A FASCINATING INQUIRY INTO THE INSTITUTIONALIZATION AND

DISSEMINATION OF MODERN CHINESE LANGUAGE FROM THE LATE

NINETEENTH CENTURY TO THE PRESENT DAY.”

—DAVID DER-WEI WANG, HARVARD UNIVERSITY

What happens when language wars are not about hurling insultsor quibbling over meanings, but are waged in the physicalsounds and shapes of language itself?

Native and foreign speakers, mother tongues and nationallanguages, have jostled for distinction throughout the modernperiod. The fight for global dominance between the English andChinese languages opens into historical battles over the controlof the medium through standardization, technology, bilingual-ism, pronunciation, and literature in the Sinophone world.Encounters between global languages, as well as the internaltensions between Mandarin and other Chinese dialects, presenta dynamic, interconnected picture of languages on the move.

In Sound and Script in Chinese Diaspora, Jing Tsuexplores the new global language trade, arguing that it aims atmore sophisticated ways of exerting influence besides simplywielding knuckles of power. Through an analysis of the differentrelationships between language standardization, technologies ofwriting, and modern Chinese literature around the worldfrom the nineteenth century to the present, this studytransforms how we understand the power of language inmigration and how that is changing the terms of culturaldominance. Drawing from an unusual array of archivalsources, this study cuts across the usual China-Westdivide and puts its finger on the pulse of a pending supra-national world under “literary governance.”

J ING TSU i s A ss i s tant Professor of Ch ineseL i te rature at Ya le Univers i t y.

JANUARY | 6 1⁄8 X 9 1⁄4 | 14 HALFTONES | 280 PP. |ISBN 978-0-674-05540-7 | $45.00X (£33.95 UK) |LITERATURE / ASIAN STUDIES

6 3w w w . h u p . h a r v a r d . e d u � h a r v a r d u n i v e r s i t y p r e s s

Page 66: Harvard University Press Fall 2010 Catalog

w w w . h u p . h a r v a r d . e d u � h a r v a r d u n i v e r s i t y p r e s s6 4

Dairy QueensThe Politics of Pastoral Architecture from Catherine de’ Medici toMarie-Antoinette

Meredith S. Martin

In a lively narrative that spans more than two centuries, Meredith Martin tells the story of a royaland aristocratic building type that has been largely forgotten today: the pleasure dairy of earlymodern France. These garden structures—most famously the faux-rustic, white marble dairybuilt for Marie-Antoinette’s Hameau at Versailles—have long been dismissed as the trifling fol-lies of a reckless elite. Martin challenges such assumptions and reveals the pivotal role thatpleasure dairies played in cultural and political life, especially with respect to polarizing debates

about nobility, femininity, and domesticity. Together with other formsof pastoral architecture such as model farms and hermitages, pleasuredairies were crucial arenas for elite women to exercise and experimentwith identity and power.

Opening with Catherine de’ Medici’s lavish dairy atFontainebleau (c. 1560), Martin’s book explores how French queensand noblewomen used pleasure dairies to naturalize their status, display

their cultivated tastes, and proclaim theirvirtue as nurturing mothers and capableestate managers. Pleasure dairies also pro-vided women with a site to promote goodhealth, by spending time in salubrious gar-dens and consuming fresh milk. Illustratedwith a dazzling array of images and pho-tographs, Dairy Queens sheds new lighton architecture, self, and society in theancien régime.

HARVARD HISTORICAL STUDIES 176 |FEBRUARY | 6 1⁄8 X 9 1⁄4 | 82 COLOR ILLUS.,8 HALFTONES | 358 PP. |ISBN 978-0-674-04899-7 |$45.00X (£33.95 UK) | HISTORY

From left : “Portrait of Marguerite Baudard deSaint-James, Marquise de Puységur” by ElisabethVigée Le Brun, 1786. Courtesy of The Snite Museumof Art, University of Notre Dame; “Portrait of theDuchesse de Guiche” by Elisabeth Vigée Le Brun,1784. Private Collection.

MERED ITH S .

MART IN

is Assistant

Professor of Art at Wellesley

College.

s o c i a l s c i e n c e

Page 67: Harvard University Press Fall 2010 Catalog

Group Experimentand OtherWritingsThe Frankfur t School on Public Opinion inPostwar Germany

Friedrich Pollock, Theodor W.Adorno, and ColleaguesEdited, translated, and introduced byAndrew J. Perrin and Jeffrey K. Olick

During the occupation of West Germany after the Second WorldWar, the American authorities commissioned polls to assess thevalues and opinions of ordinary Germans. They concluded thatthe fascist attitudes of the Nazi era had weakened to a largedegree. Theodor W. Adorno and his Frankfurt School colleagues,who returned in 1949 from the United States, were skeptical.They held that standardized polling was an inadequate andsuperficial method for exploring such questions. In their view,public opinion is not simply an aggregate of individually heldopinions, but is fundamentally a public concept, formed throughinteraction in conversations and with prevailing attitudes andideas “in the air.” In Group Experiment, edited by FriedrichPollock, they published their findings on their group discussionexperiments that delved deeper into the process of opinion for-mation. Andrew J. Perrin and Jeffrey K. Olick make a case thatthese experiments are an important missing link in the ontologyand methodology of current social-science survey research.

FRIEDRICH POLLOCK (1894–1970) was director of theInstitute for Social Research, the Frankfurt School, from1928 to 1959. THEODOR W. ADORNO (1903–1969) wasa leading figure in the Frankfurt School and one of thetwentieth century ’s most demanding intellectuals.ANDREW J. PERRIN is Associate Professor of Sociology,University of North Carolina, Chapel Hill. JEFFREY K.OLICK is Professor of Sociology and History, University ofVirginia.

FEBRUARY | 6 1⁄8 X 9 1⁄4 | 20 FIGURES, 29 TABLES | 200 PP. |ISBN 978-0-674-04846-1 | $49.95X (£36.95 UK) | SOCIOLOGY

“Neptune Transforming Cygnus into a Swan” by Nicola da Urbino.© National Museums Scotland

Venice’s MostLoyal CityCivic Identity in Renaissance Brescia

Stephen D. Bowd

By the second decade of the fifteenth century Venice had estab-lished an empire in Italy extending from its lagoon base to thelakes, mountains, and valleys of the northwestern part of thepeninsula. The wealthiest and most populous part of this empirewas the city of Brescia which, together with its surrounding ter-ritory, lay in a key frontier zone between the politically power-ful Milanese and the economically important Germans. Venetiangovernance there involved political compromise and some sen-sitivity to local concerns, and Brescians forged their distinctivecivic identity alongside a strong Venetian cultural presence.

Based on archival, artistic, and architectural evidence,Stephen Bowd presents an innovative microhistory of a fasci-nating, yet historically neglected city. He shows how Brescianloyalty to Venice was repeatedly tested by a succession of disas-ters: assault by Milanese forces, economic downturn,demographic collapse, and occupation byFrench and Spanish armies intent on dis-membering the Venetian empire. Inspite of all these troubles the cityexperienced a cultural revival and adramatic political transformationunder Venetian rule, which Bowddescribes and uses to illuminatethe process of state formation inone of the most powerful regionsof Renaissance Italy.

STEPHEN D. BOWD i sSen ior Lec turer in EuropeanHis tor y, Un iver s i t y ofEd inburgh .

I TATTI STUDIES IN ITALIAN RENAISSANCE HISTORY |NOVEMBER | 6 1⁄8 X 9 1⁄4 | 7 HALFTONES | 360 PP. |ISBN 978-0-674-05120-1 | $39.95X (£29.95 UK) | HISTORY

w w w . h u p . h a r v a r d . e d u � h a r v a r d u n i v e r s i t y p r e s s 6 5

Page 68: Harvard University Press Fall 2010 Catalog

w w w . h u p . h a r v a r d . e d u � h a r v a r d u n i v e r s i t y p r e s s6 6

Advertising EmpireRace and Visual Culture in Imperial Germany

David Ciarlo

At the end of the nineteenthcentury, Germany turnedtoward colonialism, establishingprotectorates in Africa, andtoward a mass consumer soci-ety, mapping the meaning ofcommodities through advertis-ing. These developments, dis-tinct in the world of politicaleconomy, were intertwined inthe world of visual culture.

David Ciarlo offers aninnovative visual history of each

of these transformations. Tracing commercial imagery across dif-ferent products and media, Ciarlo shows how and why the“African native” had emerged by 1900 to become a familiar fig-ure in the German landscape, selling everything from soap toshirts to coffee. The racialization of black figures, first associatedwith the American minstrel shows that toured Germany, foundever greater purchase in German advertising up to and after1905, when Germany waged war against the Herero in South-west Africa. The new reach of advertising not only expandedthe domestic audience for German colonialism, but transformedcolonialism’s political and cultural meaning as well, by infusingit with a simplified racial cast.

The visual realm shaped the worldview of the colonialrulers, illuminated the importance of commodities, and in theprocess, drew a path to German modernity. The powerful visionof racial difference at the core of this modernity would have pro-found consequences for the future.

DAV ID C IARLO i s A ss i s tant Professor of H i s tor y,Un iver s i t y of C inc innat i .

HARVARD HISTORICAL STUDIES 171 | JANUARY | 6 3⁄8 X 9 1⁄4 |29 COLOR ILLUS., 106 HALFTONES | 400 PP. | ISBN 978-0-674-05006-8 |$49.95X (£36.95 UK) | HISTORY

In the Shadow ofSectarianismLaw, Shi‘ism, and the Making of Modern Lebanon

MaxWeiss

Contrary to the conventional wisdom that sectarianism is intrin-sically linked to violence, bloodshed, or social disharmony, MaxWeiss uncovers the complex roots of Shi’i sectarianism in twen-tieth-century Lebanon.

The template for conflicted relations between the Lebanesestate and Shi’i society arose under French Mandate rule througha process of gradual transformation, long before the politicalmobilization of the Shi’i community under the charismaticImam Musa al-Sadr and his Movement of the Deprived, anddecades before the radicalization linked to Hizballah. Through-out the period, the Shi’i community was buffeted by crosscuttingpolitical, religious, and ideological currents: transnational affili-ations versus local concerns; the competing pull of Arab nation-alism and Lebanese nationalism; loyalty to Jabal Amil, thecultural heartland of Shi’i Lebanon; and the modernization ofreligious and juridical traditions.

Uncoupling the beginnings of modern Shi’i collective iden-tity from the rise of political Shi’ism, Weiss transforms our under-standing of the nature of sectarianism and shows why inLebanon it has been both so productive and so destructive atthe same time.

MAX WE ISS i s A ss i s tant Professor of H i s tor y andNear Eastern S tud ies at Pr inceton Univers i t y, and ajun ior fe l low at the Soc iety of Fe l lows, Har vardUnivers i t y.

OCTOBER | 6 1⁄8 X 9 1⁄4 | 2 MAPS | 310 PP. | ISBN 978-0-674-05298-7 |$39.95X (£29.95 UK) | HISTORY

Packaging for Ceylon Cream Chocolates by the Stollwerck firm, Cologne,Germany, ca. 1900. Verpackungsmuseum, Heidelberg.

Page 69: Harvard University Press Fall 2010 Catalog

Strangers on theWestern FrontChinese Workers in the Great War

Xu Guoqi

During World War I, Britain and France imported workers fromtheir colonies to labor behind the front lines. The single largestgroup of support labor came not from imperial colonies, how-ever, but from China. Xu Guoqi tells the remarkable story of the140,000 Chinese men recruited for the Allied war effort.

These laborers, mostly illiterate peasants from north China,came voluntarily and worked in Europe longer than any othergroup. Xu explores China’s reasons for sending its citizens tohelp the British and French (and, later, the Americans), the back-grounds of the workers, their difficult transit to Europe—acrossthe Pacific, through Canada, and over the Atlantic—and theirexperiences with the Allied armies. It was the first encounterwith Westerners for most of these Chinese peasants, and Xu alsoconsiders the story from their perspective: how they understoodthis distant war, the racism and suspicion they faced, and theirattempts to hold on to their culture so far from home.

In recovering this fascinating lost story, Xu highlights theChinese contribution to World War I and illuminates the essen-tial role these unsung laborers played in modernChina’s search for a newnational identity onthe global stage.

XU GUOQI i sP ro fessor ofH i s tor y at theUnivers i t y ofHong Kong.

FEBRUARY | 6 1⁄8 X 9 1⁄4 |30 HALFTONES,1 TABLE | 340 PP. |ISBN 978-0-674-04999-4 |$39.95X (£29.95 UK) | HISTORY

From left : Photo courtesy University of Leeds Library Special Collections:Liddle Collection; International Institute of Social History, Stefan R.Landsberger Collection (http://chineseposters.net) .

Cultivating GlobalCitizensPopulation in the Rise of China

Susan Greenhalgh

Current accounts of China’s globalrise emphasize economics and poli-tics, largely neglecting the cultivationof China’s people. Susan Greenhalgh,one of the foremost authorities onChina’s one-child policy, places thegovernance of population squarely atthe heart of China’s ascent.

Focusing on the decade since2000, and especially 2004–09, sheargues that the vital politics of population has been central tothe globalizing agenda of the reform state. By helping transformChina’s rural masses into modern workers and citizens, by work-ing to strengthen, techno-scientize, and legitimize the PRCregime, and by boosting China’s economic development andcomprehensive national power, the governance of the popula-tion has been critically important to the rise of global China.

After decades of viewing population as a hindrance tomodernization, China’s leaders are now equating it withhuman capital and redefining it as a positive factor in thenation’s transition to a knowledge-based economy. Inencouraging “human development,” the regime is trying toinduce people to become self-governing, self-enterprisingpersons who will advance their own health, education,and welfare for the benefit of the nation. From an objectof coercive restriction by the state, population is beingrefigured as a field of self-cultivation by China’s peoplethemselves.

SUSAN GREENHALGH i s P ro fessor ofAnthropo logy at the Univers i t y of Ca l i fo rn ia , I r v ine.

THE EDWIN O. REISCHAUER LECTURES | OCTOBER |6 1⁄8 X 9 1⁄4 | 1 HALFTONE, 5 LINE ILLUS., 6 TABLES | 136 PP. |ISBN 978-0-674-05571-1 | $29.95X (£22.95 UK) |ASIAN STUDIES / SOCIOLOGY

w w w . h u p . h a r v a r d . e d u � h a r v a r d u n i v e r s i t y p r e s s 6 7

Page 70: Harvard University Press Fall 2010 Catalog

w w w . h u p . h a r v a r d . e d u � h a r v a r d u n i v e r s i t y p r e s s6 8

Capitalizing on CrisisThe Political Origins of the Rise of Finance

Greta R. Krippner

In the context of the recent financial crisis, the extent to whichthe U.S. economy has become dependent on financial activitieshas been made abundantly clear. In Capitalizing on Crisis, GretaKrippner traces the longer-term historical evolution that madethe rise of finance possible, arguing that this development restedon a broader transformation of the U.S. economy than is sug-gested by the current preoccupation with financial speculation.

Krippner argues that state policies that created conditionsconducive to financialization allowed the state to avoid a seriesof economic, social, and political dilemmas that confronted pol-icymakers as postwar prosperity stalled beginning in the late1960s and 1970s. In this regard, the financialization of the econ-omy was not a deliberate outcome sought by policymakers, butrather an inadvertent result of the state’s attempts to solve otherproblems. The book focuses on deregulation of financial mar-kets during the 1970s and 1980s, encouragement of foreign cap-ital into the U.S. economy in the context of large fiscalimbalances in the early 1980s, and changes in monetary policyfollowing the shift to high interest rates in 1979.

Exhaustively researched, the book brings extensive newempirical evidence to bear on debates regarding recent devel-opments in financial markets and the broader turn to the mar-ket that has characterized U.S. society over the last severaldecades.

GRETA R . KR IPPNER i s A ss i s tant Professor ofSoc io logy at the Univers i t y of Mich igan .

FEBRUARY | 6 1⁄8 X 9 1⁄4 | 14 GRAPHS | 234 PP. |ISBN 978-0-674-05084-6 | $39.95X (£29.95 UK) |SOCIOLOGY / POLITICS

Homelessness,Housing, andMental IllnessRussell K. Schuttwith Stephen M. Goldfinger

Humans are social animals and, in general, don’t thrive in iso-lated environments. Homeless people, many of whom sufferfrom serious mental illnesses, often live socially isolated on thestreets or in shelters. Homelessness, Housing, and Mental Ill-ness describes a carefully designed large-scale study to assesshow well these people do when attempts are made to reducetheir social isolation and integrate them into the community.

Should homeless mentally ill people be provided with thetype of housing they want or with what clinicians think theyneed? Is residential staff necessary? Are roommates advanta-geous? How is community integration affected by substanceabuse, psychiatric diagnoses, and cognitive functioning? Home-lessness, Housing, and Mental Illness answers these questionsand reexamines the assumptions behind housing policies thatsupport the preference of most homeless mentally ill people tolive alone in independent apartments. The analysis shows thatliving alone reduces housing retention as well as cognitive func-tioning, while group homes improve these critical outcomes.Throughout the book, Russell Schutt explores the meaning andvalue of community for our most fragile citizens.

RUSSELL K . SCHUTT i s P ro fessor and Cha i r o fSoc io logy at Univers i t y of Massachuset t s , Boston , andLec turer on Soc io logy in the Depar tment of Psych iat r yat the Har vard Medi c a l S choo l . STEPHEN M.GOLDF INGER i s P ro fessor of Psych iat r y andBehav iora l S c iences and Depar tment Cha i r at SUNYDownstate Medi c a l Center.

FEBRUARY | 6 1⁄8 X 9 1⁄4 | 47 CHARTS, 7 TABLES | 390 PP. |ISBN 978-0-674-05101-0 | $49.95X (£36.95 UK) |SOCIOLOGY / MEDICINE

Page 71: Harvard University Press Fall 2010 Catalog

The GnosticsMyth, Ritual, and Diversity in Early Christianity

David Brakke

Who were the Gnostics? And how did the Gnostic movement influencethe development of Christianity in antiquity? Is it true that the Churchrejected Gnosticism? This book offers an illuminating discussion of recentscholarly debates over the concept of “Gnosticism” and the nature of earlyChristian diversity. Acknowledging that the category “Gnosticism” is flawedand must be reformed, David Brakke argues for a more careful approach togathering evidence for the ancientChristian movement known as theGnostic school of thought. He showshow Gnostic myth and ritualaddressed basic human concernsabout alienation and meaning, offereda message of salvation in Jesus, andprovided a way for people to regainknowledge of God, the ultimatesource of their being.

Rather than depicting theGnostics as heretics or as the losers inthe fight to define Christianity, Brakkeargues that the Gnostics participated in an ongoing reinvention of Christianity, in which otherChristians not only rejected their ideas but also adapted and transformed them. This book willchallenge scholars to think in news ways, but it also provides an accessible introduction to theGnostics and their fellow early Christians.

JANUARY | 6 1⁄8 X 9 1⁄4 | 160 PP. | ISBN 978-0-674-04684-9 |$29.95X (£22.95 UK) | RELIGION

Christ f lanked by two Apostles. Front of columnar sarcophagus with scenes of the New Testament. Marble bas rel ief,Early Christ ian, ca. 350–375 CE. Museo Pio Crist iano, Vatican Museums, Vatican State. Photo Credit : Vanni / ArtResource, NY

w w w . h u p . h a r v a r d . e d u � h a r v a r d u n i v e r s i t y p r e s s 6 9

DAV ID BRAKKE is Professor of

Religious Studies at Indiana

University. He is the author of

Demons and the Making of the Monk

(Harvard).

r e l i g i o n a n d c l a s s i c s

Page 72: Harvard University Press Fall 2010 Catalog

w w w . h u p . h a r v a r d . e d u � h a r v a r d u n i v e r s i t y p r e s s7 0

PlautusVolume I:Amphitryon.The Comedy of Asses.The Pot of Gold.TheTwo Bacchises.The Captives

Edited and translated by Wolfgang de Melo

The rollicking comedies of Plautus, who brilliantly adapted Greek plays for Romanaudiences c. 205–184 BCE, are the earliest Latin works to survive complete and are cor-

nerstones of the European theatrical tradition fromShakespeare andMolière to modern times. This

first volume of a new Loeb edition of all 21of Plautus’s extant comedies presents

Amphitruo, Asinaria, Aulularia, Bac-chides, and Captivi with freshlyedited texts, lively modern trans-lations, and ample explanatory notes. Accompanying the plays is adetailed introduction to Plautus’s œuvre as a whole, discussing histechniques of translation and adaptation, his use of Roman humor,stage conventions, language and meter, and his impact on theGreco-Roman comedic theater and beyond.

WOLFGANG DE MELO is Professor of Latin andGreek at Ghent University.

LOEB CLASSICAL LIBRARY® 60JANUARY | 4 1⁄4 X 6 3⁄8 | 534 PP. | ISBN 978-0-674-99653-3 |

$24.00 (£15.95 UK) | CLASSICS

EDITED BY JEFFREY HENDERSON

LOEB CLASSICAL LIBRARY

Page 73: Harvard University Press Fall 2010 Catalog

SaturnaliaBooks 1–2 / Books 3–5 / Books 6–7

MacrobiusEdited and translated byRobert A. Kaster

The Saturnalia, Macrobius’s encyclopedic celebration ofRoman culture written in the early fifth century BCE, hasbeen prized since the Renaissance as a treasure trove of oth-erwise unattested lore. Cast in the form of a dialogue, theSaturnalia treats subjects as diverse as the divinity of theSun and the quirks of human digestion while showcasingVergil as the master of all human knowledge from dictionand rhetoric to philosophy and religion.

The new Latin text is based on a refined understand-ing of the medieval tradition and improves on Willis’s stan-dard edition in nearly 300 places. The accompanyingtranslation—only the second in English and the only onenow in print—offers a clear and sprightly rendition ofMacrobius’s ornate Latin and is supplemented by ampleannotation. A full introduction places the work in its cul-tural context and analyzes its construction, while indexes ofnames, subjects, and ancient works cited in both text andnotes make the work more readily accessible than everbefore.

ROBERT A. KASTER is Professor of Classicsand Kennedy Foundation Professor of Latin atPrinceton University.

LOEB CLASSICAL LIBRARY® 510BOOKS 1–2 | JANUARY | 4 1⁄4 X 6 3⁄8 | 420 PP. |ISBN 978-0-674-99649-6 | $24.00 (£17.95 UK) | CLASSICS

LOEB CLASSICAL LIBRARY® 511BOOKS 3–5 | JANUARY | 4 1⁄4 X 6 3⁄8 | 422 PP. |ISBN 978-0-674-99671-7 | $24.00 (£17.95 UK) | CLASSICS

LOEB CLASSICAL LIBRARY® 512BOOKS 6–7 | JANUARY | 4 1⁄4 X 6 3⁄8 | 532 PP. |ISBN 978-0-674-99672-4 | $24.00 (£17.95 UK) | CLASSICS

The LearnedBanquetersVolumeVII: Books 13.594b–14

AthenaeusEdited and translated byS. Douglas Olson

In The Learned Banqueters, Athenaeus describes a seriesof dinner parties at which the guests quote extensively fromGreek literature. The work (which dates to the very end ofthe second century CE) is amusing reading and of extraor-dinary value as a treasury of quotations from works now lost.Athenaeus also preserves a wide range of information aboutdifferent cuisines and foodstuffs, the music and entertain-ments that ornamented banquets, and the intellectual talkthat was the heart of Greek conviviality. S. Douglas Olsonhas undertaken to produce a complete new edition of thework, replacing the previous Loeb Athenaeus (publishedunder the title Deipnosophists).

S . DOUGLAS OLSON is DistinguishedMcKnight University Professor of Classical andNear Eastern Studies at the University ofMinnesota.

LOEB CLASSICAL LIBRARY® 345JANUARY | 4 1⁄4 X 6 3⁄8 | 334 PP. | ISBN 978-0-674-99673-1 |$24.00 (£15.95 UK) | CLASSICS

w w w . h u p . h a r v a r d . e d u � h a r v a r d u n i v e r s i t y p r e s s 7 1

Page 74: Harvard University Press Fall 2010 Catalog

w w w . h u p . h a r v a r d . e d u � h a r v a r d u n i v e r s i t y p r e s s7 2

Augustine andSpinozaMilad DoueihiTranslated by Jane Marie Todd

Election and grace are two key concepts that not only haveshaped the relations between Judaism and Christianity, but alsohave formed a cornerstone of the Western philosophical dis-course on the evolution and progress of humanity. ThoughAugustine and Spinoza can be shown to share a methodologicalapproach to these concepts, their conclusions remain radicallydifferent. For the Church Father Augustine, grace defines humannature by the potential availability of divine intervention, thussetting the stage for the institutional and political legitimacy ofthe Church, the Christian state, and its justice. For Spinoza, onthe other hand, election represents a unique but local form ofdivine intervention, marked by geography and historical con-text.

Milad Doueihi maps out the consequences of such anencounter between these two thinkers in terms of their philo-sophical heritage and its continued relevance for contemporarydiscussions of religious diversity and autonomy.

Augustine asserts a theological foundation for the political,whereas Spinoza radically separates philosophy, and thus author-ity, from theology in order to solicit a political democracy. In thissharply argued and deeply learned book, Milad Doueihi showsus how interconnections between the two thinkers have cometo shape Western philosophy.

MILAD DOUE IH I i s Honorar y Professor ia l Fe l low atthe Univers i t y of G lasgow and the author of E a r t h l yP a r a d i s e (Har vard ) .

OCTOBER | 5 1⁄2 X 8 1⁄4 | 120 PP. | ISBN 978-0-674-05063-1 |$29.95X (£22.95 UK) | PHILOSOPHY

Marriage and Slaveryin Early IslamKecia Ali

What did it mean to be a wife, woman, or slave in a society inwhich a land-owning woman was forbidden to lay with her maleslave but the same slave might be allowed to take concubines?Jurists of the nascent Maliki, Hanafi, and Shafi‘i legal schoolsfrequently compared marriage to purchase and divorce to man-umission. Juggling scripture, precedent, and custom on onehand, and the requirements of logical consistency on the other,legal scholars engaged in vigorous debate. The emerging con-sensus demonstrated a self-perpetuating analogy between a hus-band’s status as master and a wife’s as slave, even as juristsinsisted on the dignity of free women and, increasingly, the mas-culine rights of enslaved husbands.

Marriage and Slavery in Early Islam presents the firstsystematic analysis of how these jurists conceptualized mar-riage—its rights and obligations—using the same rhetoric ofownership used to describe slavery. Kecia Ali explores parallelsbetween marriage and concubinage that legitimized sex andlegitimated offspring using eighth- through tenth-century legaltexts. As the jurists discussed claims spouses could make on eachother—including dower, sex, obedience, and companionship–they returned repeatedly to issues of legal status: wife and con-cubine, slave and free, male and female.

Complementing the growing body of scholarship onIslamic marital and family law, Ali boldly contributes to theongoing debates over feminism, sexuality, and reform in Islam.

KEC IA AL I i s A ss i s tant Professor of Re l ig ion atBoston Univers i t y.

OCTOBER | 6 1⁄8 X 9 1⁄4 | 234 PP. | ISBN 978-0-674-05059-4 |$39.95X (£29.95 UK) | RELIGION

Page 75: Harvard University Press Fall 2010 Catalog

Life in a ShellA Physiologist’s View of a Turtle

Donald C. Jackson

Trundling along in essentially the same form for some 220 million years, turtles have seendinosaurs come and go, mammals emerge, and humankind expand its dominion. Is it any won-der the persistent reptile bested the hare? In this engaging book physiologist Donald Jacksonshares a lifetime of observation of this curious creature, allowing us a look under the shell of ananimal at once so familiar and so strange.

Here we discover how the turtle’s proverbial slownesshelps it survive a long, cold winter under ice. How the shell notonly serves as a protective home but also influences such essentialfunctions as buoyancy control, breathing, and surviving remarkablylong periods without oxygen, and how many other physiologicalfeatures help define this unique animal. Jackson offers insight intowhat exactly it’s like to live inside a shell—to carry the heavy cara-pace on land and in water, to breathe without an expandableribcage, to have sex with all that body armor intervening.

Along the way we also learn something about the processof scientific discovery—how the answer to one question leads tonew questions, how a chance observation can change the direction of study, and above all hownew research always builds on the previous work of others. A clear and informative expositionof physiological concepts using the turtle as a model organism, the book is as interesting for whatit tells us about scientific investigation as it is for its deep and detailed understanding of howthe enduring turtle “works.”

FEBRUARY | 6 1⁄8 X 9 1⁄4 | 10 HALFTONES, 10 LINE ILLUS. | 174 PP. |ISBN 978-0-674-05034-1 | $29.95X (£22.95 UK) | NATURE

Photo by Donald C. Jackson

w w w . h u p . h a r v a r d . e d u � h a r v a r d u n i v e r s i t y p r e s s 7 3

DONALD C .

JACKSON is

Professor Emeritus

of Medical Science,

Brown University.

s c i e n c e

Page 76: Harvard University Press Fall 2010 Catalog

w w w . h u p . h a r v a r d . e d u � h a r v a r d u n i v e r s i t y p r e s s7 4

The Restless PlantDov KollerEdited by Elizabeth Van Volkenburgh

Plants, so predictable, stay where they are. And yet, like all living things, they also move: theygrow, adapt, shed leaves and bark, spread roots and branches, snare pollinators, and rewardcultivators. This book, the first to thoroughly explore the subject since Darwin’s 1881 treatiseon movements in plants, is a comprehensive, up-to-date account of the mechanisms and theadaptive values that move plants.

Drawing on examples across the spectrum of plant families—including mosses, ferns,conifers, and flowering plants—the author opens a window on how plants move: within cells,

as individual cells, and via organs. Opening with an explana-tion of how cellular motors work and how cells manage tomove organs, Dov Koller considers the movement of roots,tubers, rhizomes, and other plant parts underground, as wellas the more familiar stems, leaves, and flowers.

Throughout, Koller presents information at the sub-cellular and cellular levels, including the roles of receptors, sig-naling pathways, hormones, and physiological responses inmotor function. He also discusses the adaptive significance ofmovements. His book exposes the workings of a world littleunderstood and often overlooked, the world of restless plantsand the movements by which they accomplish the necessaryfunctions of their lives.

JANUARY | 6 1⁄8 X 9 1⁄4 | 6 HALFTONES, 30 LINE ILLUS. | 200 PP. |ISBN 978-0-674-04863-8 | $39.95X (£29.95 UK) | NATURE

Il lustrations by Dov Bock

DOV KOLLER was Professor Emeritus in

the Department of Botany at the Hebrew

University of Jerusalem. EL IZABETH

VAN VOLKENBURGH is Adjunct

Professor of Forest Resources and

Divisional Dean for Research, College of

Arts and Sciences, University of

Washington.

Page 77: Harvard University Press Fall 2010 Catalog

Maynard’s RevengeThe Collapse of Free Market Macroeconomics

Lance Taylor

It is now widely agreed that mainstream macroeconomics is irrelevant andthat there is need for a more useful and realistic economic analysis that canprovide a better understanding of the ongoing global financial and economiccrisis. Lance Taylor’s book exposes the unrealistic assumptions of the rationalexpectations and real business cycle approaches and of mainstream financetheory. It argues that in separating monetary and financial behavior from realbehavior, they do not address the ways that consumption, accumulation, andthe government play in the workings of the economy.

Taylor argues that the ideas of J. M. Keynes and others provide amore useful framework both for understanding the crisis and for dealing withit effectively. Keynes’s basic points were fundamental uncertainty and theabsence of Say’s Law. He set up machinery to analyze the macro economyunder such circumstances, including the principle ofeffective demand, liquidity preference, different rulesfor determining commodity and asset prices, distinctbehavioral patterns of different collective actors, andthe importance of thinking in terms of complete macroaccounting schemes. Economists working in this tra-dition also worked out growth and cycle models.

Employing these ideas throughout May-nard’s Revenge, Taylor provides an analytical narrativeabout the causes of the crisis, and suggestions for deal-ing with it.

JANUARY | 6 1⁄8 X 9 1⁄4 | 39 GRAPHS, 14 TABLES | 350 PP. |ISBN 978-0-674-05046-4 | $39.95X (£29.95 UK) | ECONOMICS

Catherine Ledner / Getty Images

e c o n o m i c s & l a w

LANCE TAYLOR is

Arnhold Professor of

International Cooperation

and Development at the

New School. He is the

author of Reconstructing

Macroeconomics (Harvard).

w w w . h u p . h a r v a r d . e d u � h a r v a r d u n i v e r s i t y p r e s s 7 5

Page 78: Harvard University Press Fall 2010 Catalog

w w w . h u p . h a r v a r d . e d u � h a r v a r d u n i v e r s i t y p r e s s7 6

The Crisis ofNeoliberalismGérard Duménil andDominique Lévy

This book examines “the great contraction” of 2007–2010within the context of the neoliberal globalization that began inthe early 1980s. This new phase of capitalism greatly enrichedthe top 5 percent of Americans, including capitalists and finan-cial managers, but at a significant cost to the country as a whole.Declining domestic investment in manufacturing, unsustainablehousehold debt, rising dependence on imports and financing,and the growth of a fragile and unwieldy global financial struc-ture threaten the strength of the dollar. Unless these trends arereversed, the authors predict, the U.S. economy will face sharpdecline.

Summarizing a large amount of troubling data, the authorsshow that manufacturing has declined from 40 percent of GDPto under 10 percent in thirty years. Since consumption drivesthe American economy and since manufactured goods comprisethe largest share of consumer purchases, clearly we will not beable to sustain the accumulating trade deficits.

Rather than blame individuals, such as Greenspan orBernanke, the authors focus on larger forces. Repairing thebreach in our economy will require limits on free trade and thefree international movement of capital; policies aimed at improv-ing education, research, and infrastructure; reindustrialization;and the taxation of higher incomes.

GÉRARD DUMÉN IL and DOMIN IQUE LÉVY areD i rec tor s of Research at the Cent re Nat iona l de laRecherche S c ient i f ique, Par i s , and coauthors ofC a p i t a l R e s u r g e n t (Har vard ) .

JANUARY | 6 1⁄8 X 9 1⁄4 | 76 LINE ILLUS., 6 CHARTS, 21 TABLES | 400 PP. |ISBN 978-0-674-04988-8 | $49.95X (£36.95 UK) | ECONOMICS

Consistency, Choice,and RationalityWalter Bossert andKotaro Suzumura

In Consistency, Choice, and Rationality, economic theoristsWalter Bossert and Kotaro Suzumura present a thorough math-ematical treatment of Suzumura consistency, an alternative toestablished coherence properties such as transitivity, quasi-transitivity, or acyclicity. Applications in individual and socialchoice theory, fields important not only to economics but also tophilosophy and political science, are discussed. Specifically, theauthors explore topics such as rational choice and revealed pref-erence theory, and collective decision making in an atemporalframework as well as in an intergenerational setting.

WALTER BOSSERT i s P ro fessor of Economics at theUnivers i t y of Montrea l . KOTARO SUZUMURA i sP ro fessor of Economics at Waseda Univers i t y.

OCTOBER | 6 1⁄8 X 9 1⁄4 | 1 TABLE | 176 PP. |ISBN 978-0-674-05299-4 | $39.95X (£29.95 UK) |ECONOMICS

Page 79: Harvard University Press Fall 2010 Catalog

ConstitutionalTheocracyRan Hirschl

At the intersection of two sweeping global trends—the rise ofpopular support for principles of theocratic governance and thespread of constitutionalism and judicial review—a new legalorder has emerged: constitutional theocracy. It enshrines reli-gion and its interlocutors as “a” or “the” source of legislation,and at the same time adheres to core ideals and practices of mod-ern constitutionalism. A unique hybrid of apparently conflictingworldviews, values, and interests, constitutional theocraciesthus offer an ideal setting—a “living laboratory” as it were—forstudying constitutional law as a form of politics by other means.In this book, Ran Hirschl undertakes a rigorous comparativeanalysis of religion-and-state jurisprudence from dozens of coun-tries worldwide to explore the evolving role of constitutionallaw and courts in a non-secularist world.

Counterintuitively, Hirschl argues that the constitutionalenshrinement of religion is a rational, prudent strategy thatallows opponents of theocratic governance to talk the religioustalk without walking most of what they regard as theocracy’sunappealing, costly walk. Many of the jurisdictional, enforce-ment, and cooptation advantages that gave religious legalregimes an edge in the pre-modern era, are now aiding the mod-ern state and its laws in its effort to contain religion. The “con-stitutional” in a constitutional theocracy thus fulfills the samerestricting function it carries out in a constitutional democracy:it brings theocratic governance under check and assigns to con-stitutional law and courts the task of a bulwark against the threatof radical religion.

RAN H IRSCHL i s P ro fessor of Po l i t i c a l S c ience andLaw, Univers i t y of Toronto, and Canada Research Cha i rin Const i tut iona l i sm and Democrac y.

NOVEMBER | 6 1⁄8 X 9 1⁄4 | 290 PP. | ISBN 978-0-674-04819-5 |$45.00X (£33.95 UK) | POLITICS / PHILOSOPHY

ConstitutionalIdentityGary Jeffrey Jacobsohn

In Constitutional Identity, Gary Jeffrey Jacobsohn argues that aconstitution acquires an identity through experience—from amix of the political aspirations and commitments that express anation’s past and the desire to transcend that past. It is change-able but resistant to its own destruction, and manifests itself invarious ways, as Jacobsohn shows in examples as far flung asIndia, Ireland, Israel, and the United States.

Jacobsohn argues that the presence of disharmony—boththe tensions within a constitutional order and those that existbetween a constitutional document and the society it seeks toregulate—is critical to understanding the theory and dynamicsof constitutional identity. He explores constitutional identity’sgreat practical importance for some of constitutionalism’s mostvexing questions: Is an unconstitutional constitution possible? Isthe judicial practice of using foreign sources to resolve domes-tic legal disputes a threat to vital constitutional interests? Howare the competing demands of transformation and preservationin constitutional evolution to be balanced?

GARY JEFFREY JACOBSOHN i s H . Mal co lmMacDona ld Professor of Const i tut iona l andComparat ive Law in the Depar tment of Government,Un iver s i t y of Texas at Aust in .

OCTOBER | 6 1⁄8 X 9 1⁄4 | 340 PP. | ISBN 978-0-674-04766-2 |$45.00X (£33.95 UK) | POLITICS / LAW

w w w . h u p . h a r v a r d . e d u � h a r v a r d u n i v e r s i t y p r e s s 7 7

Page 80: Harvard University Press Fall 2010 Catalog

w w w . h u p . h a r v a r d . e d u � h a r v a r d u n i v e r s i t y p r e s s7 8

LegalityScott J. Shapiro

What is law? This question has preoccupied philosophers fromPlato to Thomas Hobbes to H. L. A. Hart, yet many others findit perplexing, even frivolous. Why do we need a general theoryof what law is? What does it have to do with legal practice? InLegality, Scott Shapiro draws on current work in the theory ofaction to offer an original and compelling answer to this peren-nial philosophical question. Breaking with a long tradition injurisprudence, Shapiro argues that legal systems are not definedby rules but by plans. He shows how thinking about laws asplans resolves many vexing puzzles about the nature of law anddemonstrates its profound implications for the practice of legalinterpretation.

By introducing us to the Planning Theory, Shapironot only develops a highly distinctive and promising answer tothe question of what law is, but also vindicates the value of thequestion itself. Through careful argumentation and analysis ofcurrent legal controversies, Shapiro shows that jurisprudence isnot formal and arid, as some have alleged, but vitally important.In fact, many of the most pressing issues that confront lawyersdemand that these grand philosophical questions be resolvedfirst. Written in clear, jargon-free language, and presupposing nolegal or philosophical background, Legality offers a ground-breaking new theory of law as well as an excellent introductionto, and defense of, classical jurisprudence.

SCOTT J . SHAP IRO i s P ro fessor of Law at Ya le LawSchoo l .

BELKNAP PRESS | JANUARY | 6 1⁄8 X 9 1⁄4 | 360 PP. |ISBN 978-0-674-05566-7 | $39.95X (£29.95 UK) | LAW

Legally PoisonedHow the Law Puts Us at Risk from Toxicants

Carl F. Cranor

Take a random walk through your life and you’ll find it is awashin industrial, often toxic, chemicals. Sip water from a plastic bot-tle and ingest bisphenol A. Prepare dinner in a non-stick fryingpan or wear a layer of Gore-Tex only to be exposed to perfluo-rinated compounds. Hang curtains, clip your baby into a car seat,watch television—all are manufactured with brominated flame-retardants.

Cosmetic ingredients, industrial chemicals, pesticides,and other compounds enter our bodies and remain briefly orpermanently. Far too many suspected toxic hazards areunleashed every day that affect the development and function ofour brain, immune system, reproductive organs, or hormones.But no public health law requires product testing of most chem-ical compounds before they enter the market. If products aredeemed dangerous, toxicants must be forcibly reduced orremoved—but only after harm has been done.

In this scientifically rigorous legal analysis, Carl Cranorargues that just as pharmaceuticals and pesticides cannot be soldwithout pre-market testing, other chemical products should besubject to the same safety measures. Cranor shows, in terrifyingdetail, what risks we run, and that it is entirely possible to designa less dangerous commercial world.

CARL F. CRANOR i s D i s t ingu i shed Professor ofPh i losophy at the Univers i t y of Ca l i fo rn ia , R iver s ide.

FEBRUARY | 6 1⁄8 X 9 1⁄4 | 256 PP. | ISBN 978-0-674-04970-3 |$35.00X (£25.95 UK) | LAW / ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES

.

Page 81: Harvard University Press Fall 2010 Catalog

d u m b a r t o n o a k s r e s e a r c h l i b r a r y a n d c o l l e c t i o n

San Marco,Byzantium, and theMyths ofVeniceEdited by Henry Maguire andRobert S. Nelson

The church of San Marcoof Venice has long playeda central role in Venetianpolitical, ceremonial, andreligious life. Its renownedassemblage of mosaics,sculpture, metalwork, andreliquaries are, in origin,Roman, Byzantine, Vene-tian, or Venetian imitationof Byzantine designs. InSan Marco, Byzantium,and the Myths of Venice,the authors assess the sig-

nificance of the embellishment of the church and its immediatesurroundings, especially during the thirteenth and fourteenthcenturies, when most of the Byzantine material was acquired,largely from Constantinople. The church and its decoration arestudied in relation to Venice’s interests abroad and on mainlandItaly. The authors address the diverse styles, sources, meanings,and significance of this art, both individually and as an ensem-ble. Building upon developments in scholarship since OttoDemus’s masterly studies of the church, the book offers newinsights into the inspiration, purposes, and mutability of SanMarco and the myths that inspired and motivated Venetians.

HENRY MAGUIRE i s a former D i rec tor of Byzant ineStud ies at Dumbar ton Oaks and Professor of Ar tH i s tor y at Johns Hopkins Un ivers i t y. ROBERT S .NELSON i s P ro fessor of the Hi s tor y of Ar t at Ya le .

DUMBARTON OAKS BYZANTINE SYMPOSIA AND COLLOQUIA |DECEMBER | 7 X 10 | 12 COLOR ILLUS., 131 HALFTONES | 328 PP. |ISBN 978-0-88402-360-9 | $60.00X (£44.95 UK) | ARCHITECTURE

Early ByzantinePilgrimage ArtRevised Edition

Gary Vikan

Early Byzantine Pilgrimage Art exploresthe portable artifacts of eastern Mediter-ranean pilgrimage from the fifth to theseventh century, presenting them in thecontext of contemporary pilgrims’ textsand the archaeology of sacred sites. Thebook shows how the iconography anddevotional piety of Byzantine pilgrim-age art changed, and it surveys thematerial and social culture of pilgrim-age. What did these early religious trav-elers take home with them and whatdid they leave behind? Where werethese “sacred souvenirs” manufacturedand what was their purpose? How did theimages imprinted upon many of them helprealize that purpose? The first edition ofthis pathbreaking book, published in1982, established late antique pilgrimageand its artifacts as an important topic of study.In this revised, enlarged version, Gary Vikansignificantly expands the narrative by situating themiraculous world of the early Byzantine pilgrimwithin the context of late antique magic and pre-Chris-tian healing shrines, and by considering the trajectory of pil-grimage after the Arab conquest of the seventh century.

GARY V IKAN i s the D i rec tor of the Wal ter s Ar tMuseum.

DUMBARTON OAKS BYZANTINE COLLECTION PUBLICATIONS 5 |DECEMBER | 9 X 10 | 53 COLOR ILLUS., 6 HALFTONES, 1 MAP | 128 PP. |PAPER: ISBN 978-0-88402-358-6 | $29.95X (£22.95 UK) | ART / RELIGION

w w w . h u p . h a r v a r d . e d u � h a r v a r d u n i v e r s i t y p r e s s 7 9

Page 82: Harvard University Press Fall 2010 Catalog

w w w . h u p . h a r v a r d . e d u � h a r v a r d u n i v e r s i t y p r e s s � d u m b a r t o n o a k s8 0

A Home of theHumanitiesThe Collecting and Patronage of Mildred andRober t Woods Bliss

Edited by James N. Carder

Mildred and Robert Woods Bliss wereconsummate collectors and patrons.After purchasing Dumbarton Oaks in1920, they significantly redesigned thehouse and its interiors, built importantnew structures, added over fifty acres ofplanned gardens, hosted important musi-cal evenings and intellectual discussionsin their Music Room, and acquired aworld-class art collection and library.

The illustrated essays in this vol-ume reveal how the Blisses’ wide-rang-

ing interests in art, music, gardens, architecture, andinterior design resulted in the creation of the Dumbarton OaksResearch Library and Collection. Their collections of Byzantineand Pre-Columbian art and rare garden books and drawings areexamined by Robert Nelson, Julie Jones, and Therese O’Malley,respectively. James Carder provides the Blisses’ biography anddiscusses their patronage of various architects, including PhilipJohnson, and the interior designer Armand Albert Rateau. TheBlisses’ collaboration with Beatrix Farrand on the creation of theDumbarton Oaks Gardens is recounted by Robin Karson, andtheir commission of Igor Stravinsky’s Dumbarton Oaks Concertoand its premiere by Nadia Boulanger is examined by JeaniceBrooks. The volume demonstrates that every aspect of theBlisses’ collecting and patronage had a place in the creation ofwhat they came to call their “home of the humanities.”

JAMES N . CARDER i s A rch iv i s t and HouseCo l lec t ion Manager at Dumbar ton Oaks ResearchL ibrar y and Co l lec t ion .

DECEMBER | 9 X 11 | 47 COLOR ILLUS., 101 HALFTONES | 224 PP. |ISBN 978-0-88402-365-4 | $65.00X (£48.95 UK) | BIOGRAPHY / ART

American Art atDumbarton OaksJames N. Carder

Mildred and Robert WoodsBliss, the founders of Dumb-arton Oaks, were not, per se,collectors of American art.Nevertheless, they acquiredinteresting and, at times,important examples of Ameri-can paintings, drawings, etch-ings, and sculptures. Suchacquisitions were but a part ofan overall collection whichcomprised ancient Chinese,Greek, Roman, Byzantine,Pre-Columbian, and Europeanold master artworks as well as

rare books, literary manuscripts and correspondence, importantfurnishings, unusual bibelots, and concert-quality instruments.The American artworks that remain at Dumbarton Oaks offeran important insight into the Blisses’ remarkable breadth ofvision for their collection.

This volume catalogues the American art collection atDumbarton Oaks and is published in conjunction with an exhi-bition, “American Art at Dumbarton Oaks.” An introductoryessay describes the formation of this collection by Mildred andRobert Woods Bliss and their parents Anna and William H. Bliss,while the subsequent catalogue entries elaborate on nineteenartworks by James Abbott McNeill Whistler, Elihu Vedder,Walter Gay, Childe Hassam, Albert Edward Sterner, HenryGolden Dearth, and Bernice Cross. Richly illustrated with colorplates and comparative illustrations, this catalogue will be animportant and enduring reference for scholars, students, andadmirers of American art.

DUMBARTON OAKS COLLECTION SERIES | JANUARY | 8 X 9 1⁄2 |24 COLOR PHOTOS | 128 PP. |PAPER: ISBN 978-0-88402-366-1 | $20.95X (£15.95 UK) | ART

Page 83: Harvard University Press Fall 2010 Catalog

The Place ofStone MonumentsContext, Use, and Meaning in Mesoamerica’sPreclassic Transition

Edited by Julia Guernsey, John E.Clark, and Barbara Arroyo

This volume considers the significance of stone monuments inPreclassic Mesoamerica, focusing on the period following theprecocious appearance of monumental sculpture at the Olmecsite of San Lorenzo and preceding the rise of the Classic politiesin the Maya region and Central Mexico. By quite literally “plac-ing” sculptures in their cultural, historical, social, political, reli-gious, and cognitive contexts, the seventeen contributors utilizearchaeological and art historical methods to understand the ori-gins, growth, and spread of civilization in Middle America. Theypresent abundant new data and new ways of thinking about

sculpture and society in Preclassic Mesoamerica, andcall into question the traditional dividing linebetween Preclassic and Classic cultures. They offernot only a fruitful way of rethinking the beginningsof civilization in Mesoamerica, but provide a seriesof detailed discussions concerning how these begin-nings were dynamically visualized through sculp-tural programming during the Preclassic period.

JUL IA GUERNSEY i s A ssoc iate Professor of Ar t andAr t H i s tor y at the Univers i t y of Texas, Aust in .JOHN E . CLARK i s P ro fessor of Anthropo logy andD i rec tor of the New Wor ld Archaeo log i c a l Foundat ionat Br igham Young Univers i t y. BARBARA ARROYO i sResearch Assoc iate at the Museo Popo l Vuh inGuatemala C i ty.

PRE-COLUMBIAN SYMPOSIA AND COLLOQUIA |NOVEMBER | 8 1⁄2 X 11 | 94 HALFTONES,88 BLACK &WHITE ILLUS., 31 MAPS, 5 TABLES | 368 PP. |ISBN 978-0-88402-364-7 | $59.95X (£44.95 UK) | ARCHAEOLOGY

w w w . h u p . h a r v a r d . e d u � h a r v a r d u n i v e r s i t y p r e s s 8 1

Wildlands andWoodlandsA Vision for the New England Landscape

David R. Foster and colleagues

The New England landscape, one of the most heavily forestedregions in the U.S., currently stands at a unique and urgent junc-ture for conservation. Over the past twenty years, developmenthas perforated forests and farms in every New England state,endangering the contiguous landscapes that are the center ofour local resource base, cultural heritage, and regional resilienceto dramatic environmental change. This volume presents an eco-logically salient call to action, grounded in the scholarship ofmore than a dozen of the region’s leading experts in ecology,forestry, and agriculture. The Wildlands and Woodlands visionseeks to preserve and enhance the many ecological, socioeco-

nomic, and cultural benefits offorested landscapes for everyone inthe region, from our most denselysettled cities to our most heavilywooded lands. Drawing on theregion’s rich history of land con-servation and appealing directly toits citizens, this new vision buildsa strong case for a collaborativeendeavor to conserve 70 percentof the New England landscape inforest in perpetuity.

DAV ID R . FOSTER i s D i rec tor of the Har vard Fores tin Peter sham, Massachuset t s , and teaches eco logy atHar vard Univers i t y.

OCTOBER | 9 X 12 | 30 COLOR ILLUS. | 36 PP. |PAPER: ISBN 978-1-4507-0603-2 | $5.00X (£3.95 UK) |ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES

h a r v a r d f o r e s t

Page 84: Harvard University Press Fall 2010 Catalog

w w w . h u p . h a r v a r d . e d u � h a r v a r d u n i v e r s i t y p r e s s � g r a d u a t e s c h o o l o f d e s i g n8 2

New Geographies, 3Urbanisms of Color

Edited by Gareth Doherty

Color is a ubiquitous yet essential part of the city, creating andshaping urban form. Who can forget the whites of modernistBrasilia? The greens of historic Cairo? The rosy reds of Petra?The terracottas of South America’s shantytowns? The colorcacophonies of Times Square and Shinjuku? Colors have a pres-ence over and beyond the objects—buildings, spaces, billboards,artifacts, and people—that make up the city. Not only does colorgive meaning to cities, cities give meaning to color. Whethercarefully coordinated, clashing, or an expression of materials,color is a powerful cultural, economic, and political force incities. Yet discussions on the city do not usually focus much oncolor, perhaps because urban colors are too often understood asbeing beyond any one authority or taste, or are simply dismissedas cosmetic, naïve, or intangible. Volume 3 of New Geographiesbrings together artists and designers, anthropologists, geogra-phers, historians, and philosophers with the aim of challengingthe status quo and exploring the potency, the interaction, andthe neglected design possibilities of color at the scale of the city.

GARETH DOHERTY i s a doc tora l c and idate at theHar vard Graduate S choo l o f Des ign .

NEW GEOGRAPHIES |SEPTEMBER | 8 X 10 | 70 COLOR ILLUS., 24 HALFTONES | 168 PP. |PAPER: ISBN 978-1-934510-26-1 | $20.00X (£14.95 UK) | DESIGN

New Geographies, 4Scales of the Ear th

Edited by El Hadi Jazairy

The first Apollo images of the Earth produced a perspectiveenabling humanity to act on Earth and its nature as if it con-trolled it from “outside.” The recent developments of satellitetechnologies have had a significant impact on the modes of rep-resentation as well as the conceptions of geography and space.This new “geography from above”—the home, the city, entireterritories, the Earth itself, the Moon, Mars, and beyond—rede-fine our environment, subjectivities, and practices. With suchtools at hand, architects conceive of the geographic as a possiblescale, site of intervention, and design approach.

The scale of vision, viewpoint, and qualification of spacemade possible by satellite imagery reframes contemporarydebates on design, agency, and territory. Volume 4 ofNew Geog-raphies features articles and projects that critically address therelationship of space with such modes of representation. Whatare the characteristics of such an integrated elevated vision, andwhat geographical knowledge does it bring forth? How is suchan analytical space to be subsequently interpreted and experi-enced? What are the cultural, political, and environmental reper-cussions of a vision celebrated as objective and universalist?What new global issues and debates do such scales of visionraise, and how do such visualizations of the Earth-as-home inter-sect with concerns of ecology and calls for global awareness?

EL HAD I JAZA IRY i s a doc tora l c and idate at theHar vard Graduate S choo l o f Des ign .

NEW GEOGRAPHIES |DECEMBER | 8 X 10 | 80 COLOR ILLUS., 22 HALFTONES | 160 PP. |PAPER: ISBN 978-1-934510-27-8 | $20.00X (£14.95 UK) | DESIGN

h a r v a r d g r a d u a t e s c h o o l o f d e s i g n

Page 85: Harvard University Press Fall 2010 Catalog

Ancestral Memory inEarly ChinaK. E. Brashier

Ancestral ritual in early Chinawas an orchestrated dancebetween what was present(the offerings and the living)and what was absent (theancestors). The interconnec-tions among the tangible ele-ments of the sacrifice wereovert and almost mechanical,but extending those connec-tions to the invisible guestsrequired a medium that wasitself invisible. Thus in early

China, ancestral sacrifice was associated with focused thinkingabout the ancestors, with a structured mental effort by theliving to reach out to the absent forebears and to give themshape and existence. Thinking about the ancestors—about thosewho had become distant—required active deliberation and med-itation, qualities that had to be nurtured and learned.

This study is a history of the early Chinese ancestral cult,particularly its cognitive aspects. Its goals are to excavate thecult’s color and vitality and to quell assumptions that it was nomore than a simplistic and uninspired exchange of food forlongevity, of prayers for prosperity. Ancestor worship wasnot, the author contends, merely mechanical and thoughtless.Rather, it was an idea system that aroused serious debates aboutthe nature of postmortem existence, served as the religious back-bone to Confucianism, and may even have been the forerunnerof Daoist and Buddhist meditation practices.

K . E . BRASH IER i s P ro fessor of Re l ig ion at ReedCo l lege.

HARVARD-YENCHING INSTITUTE MONOGRAPH SERIES 72 | JANUARY |6 X 9 | 6 HALFTONES, 2 LINE ILLUS. | 350 PP. |ISBN 978-0-674-05607-7 | $49.95X (£36.95 UK) |HISTORY / ASIAN STUDIES

The Dynamics ofMasters LiteratureEarly Chinese Thought from Confucius to Han Feizi

Wiebke Denecke

The importance of the rich corpus of “Masters Lit-erature” that developed in China from the sixththrough the third centuries BCE has long been rec-ognized. But just what are these texts? Scholarshave overwhelmingly approached them as philoso-phy, but these writings have also been studied as lit-erature, history, and anthropological, religious, andpaleographic records. How should we translatethese texts for our times?

This book explores these questions throughclose readings of seven examples of Masters Litera-ture and asks what proponents of a “Chinese philosophy” gainedby creating a Chinese equivalent of philosophy and what wemight gain by approaching these texts through other disciplines,questions, and concerns. What happens when we remove theaccrued disciplinary and conceptual baggage from the MastersTexts? What neglected problems, concepts, and strategies cometo light? And can those concepts and strategies help us see thehistory of philosophy in a different light and engender newapproaches to philosophical and intellectual inquiry? By histori-cizing the notion of Chinese philosophy, we can, the author con-tends, answer not only the question of whether there is aChinese philosophy but also the more interesting question ofthe future of philosophical thought around the world.

WIEBKE DENECKE i s A ss i s tant Professor of As ianCu l tures at Barnard Co l lege.

HARVARD-YENCHING INSTITUTE MONOGRAPH SERIES 74 | MARCH |6 X 9 | 325 PP. | ISBN 978-0-674-05609-1 |$49.95X (£36.95 UK) | LITERATURE / ASIAN STUDIES

w w w . h u p . h a r v a r d . e d u � h a r v a r d u n i v e r s i t y p r e s s 8 3

h a r v a r d u n i v e r s i t y a s i a c e n t e r

Page 86: Harvard University Press Fall 2010 Catalog

w w w . h u p . h a r v a r d . e d u � h a r v a r d u n i v e r s i t y p r e s s � a s i a c e n t e r

8 4

The Poetics ofSovereigntyOn Emperor Taizong of the Tang Dynasty

Jack W. Chen

Emperor Taizong (r. 626–49) of the Tang isremembered as an exemplary ruler. This studyaddresses that aura of virtuous sovereignty andTaizong’s construction of a reputation for moralrulership through his own literary writings—

with particular attention to his poetry. The author highlights therelationship between historiography and the literary and rhetor-ical strategies of sovereignty, contending that, for Taizong, andfor the concept of sovereignty in general, politics is inextricablefrom cultural production.

The work focuses on Taizong’s literary writings that speakdirectly to the relationship between cultural form and sovereignpower, as well as on the question of how the Tang negotiateddynastic identity through literary stylistics. The author maintainsthat Taizong’s writings may have been self-serving at times, rep-resenting strategic attempts to control his self-image in the eyesof his court and empire, but that they also become the idealimage to which his self was normatively bound. This is the

paradox at the heart of imperial authorship: Taizongwas simultaneously the author of his representationand was authored by his representation; he wasboth subject and object of his writings.

JACK W. CHEN i s A ss i s tant Professor ofCh inese Poet r y and Thought at the Univers i t y ofCa l i fo rn ia , Los Ange les .

HARVARD-YENCHING INSTITUTE MONOGRAPH SERIES 71 |JANUARY | 6 X 9 | 420 PP. |ISBN 978-0-674-05608-4 | $55.00X (£40.95 UK) |HISTORY / ASIAN STUDIES

Manifest inWords,Written on PaperProducing and Circulating Poetr y in Tang Dynasty China

Christopher M. B. Nugent

This study aims to engage the tex-tual realities of medieval literatureby shedding light on the materiallives of poems during the Tang,from their initial oral or writteninstantiation through their oftenlengthy and twisted paths of cir-culation. Tang poems exist todayin stable written forms assumedto reflect their creators’ originalintent. Yet Tang poetic culturewas based on hand-copied manu-

scripts and oral performance. We have almost no access to thispoetry as it was experienced by contemporaries. This is notrivial matter, the author argues. If we do not understand howTang people composed, experienced, and transmitted thispoetry, we miss something fundamental about the roles of mem-ory and copying in the circulation of poetry as well as readers’dynamic participation in the creation of texts.

We learn something different about poems when we exam-ine them, not as literary works transcending any particular phys-ical form, but as objects with distinct physical attributes, visualand sonic. The attitudes of the Tang audience toward the sta-bility of texts matters as well. Understanding Tang poetryrequires acknowledging that Tang literary culture accepted theconscious revision of these works by authors, readers, andtransmitters.

CHR ISTOPHER M. B . NUGENT i s A ss i s tantProfessor of Ch inese at Wi l l i ams Co l lege.

HARVARD-YENCHING INSTITUTE MONOGRAPH SERIES 70 | OCTOBER |6 X 9 | 1 HALFTONE | 300 PP. | ISBN 978-0-674-05603-9 |$45.00X (£33.95 UK) | LITERATURE / ASIAN STUDIES

Page 87: Harvard University Press Fall 2010 Catalog

‘Dividing the Realmin Order to Govern’The Spatial Organization of the Song State (960–1276 C E)

Ruth Mostern

States are inherently and fundamentally geographical. Sover-eignty is based on control of territory. This book uses Song Chinato explain how a pre-industrial regime organized itself spatiallyin order to exercise authority. On more than a thousand occa-sions, the Song court founded, abolished, promoted, demoted,and reordered jurisdictions in an attempt to maximize the effec-tiveness of limited resources in a climate of shifting priorities, toplacate competing constituencies, and to address military andeconomic crises. Spatial transformations in the Song field admin-istration changed the geography of commerce, taxation, revenueaccumulation, warfare, foreign relations, and social organiza-tion, and even determined the termsof debates about imperial power.

The chronology of tenth-centuryimperial consolidation, eleventh-cen-tury political reform, and twelfth-cen-tury localism traced in this book is afamiliar one. But by detailing the rela-tionship between the court and localadministration, this book complicatesthe received paradigm of Song cen-tralization and decentralization. Songfrontier policies formed a coherentimperial approach to administering peripheral regions with inac-cessible resources and limited infrastructure. And the well-known events of the Song—wars and reforms—were oftenresponses to long-term spatial and demographic change.

RUTH MOSTERN i s A ss i s tant Professor of H i s tor y atthe Univers i t y of Ca l i fo rn ia , Merced.

HARVARD-YENCHING INSTITUTE MONOGRAPH SERIES 73 | MARCH |6 X 9 | 8 HALFTONES, 9 LINE ILLUS., 37 MAPS | 420 PP. |ISBN 978-0-674-05602-2 | $55.00X (£40.95 UK) |HISTORY / ASIAN STUDIES

Songs ofContentment andTransgressionDischarged Officials and LiteratiCommunities in Sixteenth-Centur y Nor thChina

Tian Yuan Tan

A discharged official in mid-Ming China faced sig-nificant changes in his life. This book exploresthree such officials in the sixteenth century—Wang Jiusi, Kang Hai, and Li Kaixian—whoturned to literary endeavors when forced to retire.Instead of the formal writing expected of scholar-officials, however, they chose to engage in the stig-

matized genre of qu (songs), a collective term for drama andsanqu. As their efforts reveal, a disappointing end to an offi-cial career and a physical move away from the center led totheir embrace of qu and the pursuit of a marginalized liter-ary genre.

This book also attempts to sketch the largely unknownliterary landscape of mid-Ming north China. After theirretirements, these three writers became cultural leaders intheir native regions. Wang, Kang, and Li are studied herenot as solitary writers but as central figures in the “qu com-munities” that formed around them. Using such communi-ties as the basic unit in the study of qu allows us to see howsanqu and drama were produced, transmitted, and “used”

among these writers, things less evident when we focus on theindividual.

T IAN YUAN TAN i s Lec turer in Trad i t iona l Ch ineseL i te rature and Cu l ture at the S choo l o f O r ienta l andAf r i c an Stud ies , Un iver s i t y of London.

HARVARD-YENCHING INSTITUTE MONOGRAPH SERIES 75 | NOVEMBER |6 X 9 | 325 PP. | ISBN 978-0-674-05604-6 |$45.00X (£33.95 UK) | HISTORY / ASIAN STUDIES

w w w . h u p . h a r v a r d . e d u � h a r v a r d u n i v e r s i t y p r e s s � a s i a c e n t e r 8 5

Page 88: Harvard University Press Fall 2010 Catalog

w w w . h u p . h a r v a r d . e d u � h a r v a r d u n i v e r s i t y p r e s s � a s i a c e n t e r8 6

Seeing StarsSpor ts Celebrity, Identity, and Body Culture inModern Japan

Dennis J. Frost

In Seeing Stars, Dennis J. Frost traces the emer-gence and evolution of sports celebrity in Japanfrom the seventeenth through the twenty-firstcenturies. Frost explores how various con-stituencies have repeatedly molded and deployedrepresentations of individual athletes, revealingthat sports stars are socially constructed phe-nomena, the products of both particular historicalmoments and broader discourses of celebrity.

Drawing from media coverage, biographies,literary works, athletes’ memoirs, bureaucraticmemoranda, interviews, and films, Frost arguesthat the largely unquestioned mass of informa-

tion about sports stars not only reflects, but also shapes societyand body culture. He examines the lives and times of star ath-letes—including sumo grand champion Hitachiyama, femaleOlympic medalist Hitomi Kinue, legendary pitcher SawamuraEiji, and world champion boxer Gushiken Yoko —demonstrat-ing how representations of such sports stars mediated Japan’semergence into the putatively universal realm of sports, unset-tled orthodox notions of gender, facilitated wartime mobiliza-tion of physically fit men and women, and masked lingeringinequalities in postwar Japanese society.

As the first critical examination of the history of sportscelebrity outside a Euro-American context, this book also shedsnew light on the transnational forces at play in the productionand impact of celebrity images and dispels misconceptions thatsports stars in the non-West are mere imitations of their Westerncounterparts.

DENN IS J . FROST i s A ss i s tant Professor of H i s tor yat Xav ie r Un iver s i t y.

HARVARD EAST ASIAN MONOGRAPHS 331 | OCTOBER | 6 X 9 |37 HALFTONES | 350 PP. | ISBN 978-0-674-05610-7 |$49.95X (£36.95 UK) HISTORY / SPORTS

Sailor DiplomatNomura Kichisaburō and the Japanese-American War

Peter Mauch

As Japan’s pre–Pearl Harborambassador to the United States,Admiral Nomura Kichisaburo(1877–1964) played a signifi-cant role in a tense and turbu-lent period in Japanese-U.S.relations. Scholars tend to viewhis actions and missteps asambassador as representing thefailure of diplomacy to avert theoutbreak of hostilities betweenthe two paramount Pacific powers.

This extensively researched biography casts new light onthe life and career of this important figure. Connecting his expe-riences as a naval officer to his service as foreign minister andambassador, and later as “father” of Japan’s Maritime SelfDefense Forces and proponent of the U.S.-Japanese alliance, thisstudy reassesses Nomura’s contributions as a hard-nosed realistwhose grasp of the underlying realities of Japanese-U.S. relationswent largely unappreciated by the Japanese political and mili-tary establishment.

In highlighting the complexities and conundrums ofNomura’s position, as well as the role of the Imperial Navy in theformulation of Japan’s foreign policy, Peter Mauch draws uponrarely accessed materials from naval and diplomatic archives inJapan as well as various collections of personal papers, includingNomura’s, which Mauch discovered in 2005 and which arenow housed in the National Diet Library.

PETER MAUCH i s A ss i s tant Professor ofInternat iona l H i s tor y at R i t sumeikan Univers i t y.

HARVARD EAST ASIAN MONOGRAPHS 333 | DECEMBER | 6 X 9 |24 HALFTONES | 400 PP. | ISBN 978-0-674-05599-5 |$45.00X (£33.95 UK) | BIOGRAPHY / ASIAN STUDIES

Page 89: Harvard University Press Fall 2010 Catalog

A Place in PublicWomen’s Rights in Meiji Japan

Marnie S. Anderson

This book addresses how gender became a defining category inthe political and social modernization of Japan. During the earlydecades of the Meiji period (1868–1912), the Japanese encoun-tered an idea with great currency in the West: that the socialposition of women reflected a country’s level of civilization.Although elites initiated dialogue out of concern for their coun-try’s reputation internationally, the conversation soon moved toa new public sphere where individuals engaged in a wide-rang-ing debate about women’s roles and rights.

By examining these debates throughout the 1870s and1880s, Marnie S. Anderson argues that shifts in the gender sys-tem led to contradictory consequences for women. On the onehand, as gender displaced sta-tus as the primary system ofsocial and legal classification,women gained access to thelanguage of rights and thechance to represent them-selves in public and play a lim-ited political role; on theother, the modern Japanesestate permitted women’s polit-ical participation only as anexpression of their “citizen-ship through the household”and codified their formalexclusion from the politicalprocess through a series of laws enacted in 1890. This bookshows how “a woman’s place” in late-nineteenth-century Japanwas characterized by contradictions and unexpected conse-quences, by new opportunities and new constraints.

MARN IE S . ANDERSON i s A ss i s tant Professor ofH i s tor y at Smith Co l lege.

HARVARD EAST ASIAN MONOGRAPHS 332 | NOVEMBER |6 X 9 | 300 PP. | ISBN 978-0-674-05605-3 | $45.00X (£33.95 UK) |HISTORY / ASIAN STUDIES

Technology of EmpireTelecommunications and JapaneseExpansion in Asia, 1883–1945

Daqing Yang

Nearly half a century ago, the economic histo-rian Harold Innis pointed out that the geo-graphical limits of empires were determined bycommunications and that, historically, advancesin the technologies of transport and communi-cations have enabled empires to grow. Thispower of communications was demonstratedwhen Japanese Emperor Hirohito’s radio speechannouncing Japan’s surrender and the dissolu-tion of its empire was broadcast simultaneously throughout notonly the Japanese home islands but also all the territories underits control over the telecommunications system that had, inpart, made that empire possible.

In the extension of the Japanese empire in the 1930s and1940s, technology, geo-strategy, and institutions were closelyintertwined in empire building. The central argument of thisstudy of the development of a communications network link-ing the far-flung parts of the Japanese imperium is that moderntelecommunications not only served to connect these territo-ries but, more important, made it possible for the Japanese toenvision an integrated empire in Asia. Even as the imperialcommunications network served to foster integration andstrengthened Japanese leadership and control, its creation andoperation exacerbated long-standing tensions and created newconflicts within the government, the military, and society ingeneral.

DAQING YANG is Associate Professor of History andInternational Affairs at George Washington University.

HARVARD EAST ASIAN MONOGRAPHS 219 | SEPTEMBER | 6 X 9 |8 HALFTONES, 10 LINE ILLUS., 5 MAPS | 575 PP. |ISBN 978-0-674-01091-8 | $59.95X (£44.95 UK) |ASIAN STUDIES / HISTORY

w w w . h u p . h a r v a r d . e d u � h a r v a r d u n i v e r s i t y p r e s s � a s i a c e n t e r 8 7

Page 90: Harvard University Press Fall 2010 Catalog

When EmpireComes HomeRepatriation and Reintegration in Postwar Japan

Lori Watt

Following the end of World War II in Asia, theAllied powers repatriated over six million Japanesenationals from colonies and battlefields throughoutAsia and deported more than a million colonial sub-jects from Japan to their countries of origin.

Depicted at the time as a postwar measure related to thedemobilization of defeated Japanese soldiers, this populationtransfer was a central element in the human dismantling of theJapanese empire that resonates with other post-colonial and post-imperial migrations in the twentieth century.

Lori Watt analyzes how the human remnants of empire,those who were moved and those who were left behind, servedas sites of negotiation in the process of the jettisoning of the colo-nial project and in the creation of new national identities inJapan. Through an exploration of the creation and uses of thefigure of the repatriate, in political, social, and cultural realms,this study addresses the question of what happens when empirecomes home.

LOR I WATT i s A ss i s tant Professor of H i s tor y atWash ington Univers i t y in S t . Lou i s .

HARVARD EAST ASIAN MONOGRAPHS 317 |CLOTH: AUGUST 2009 | 978-0-674-03342-9 |OCTOBER | 6 X 9 | 1 HALFTONE, 3 MAPS, 4 TABLES | 275 PP. |PAPER: ISBN 978-0-674-05598-8 | $24.95X (£18.95 UK) |ASIAN STUDIES

RESAnthropology and Aesthetics, 57/58

Spring/Autumn 2010

Edited by Francesco Pellizzi

This double volume of the renowned interna-tional journal of anthropology and comparativeaesthetics includes “Aesthetics’ non-recyclableground” by Félix Duque; “Seeing through deadeyes” by Jonathan Hay; “The hidden aesthetic

of red in the painted tombs of Oaxaca” by Diana Magaloni; “Aconsideration of the quatrefoil motif in Preclassic Mesoamerica”by Julia Guernsey; “Hunters, Sufis, soldiers, and minstrels” byCynthia Becker; “Figures fidjiennes” by Marc Rochette; “Asacred landscape” by Rachel Kousser; “Military architecture as apolitical tool in the Renaissance” by Francesco Benelli; “The icon

as performer and as performative utterance” by Marie Gasper-Hulvat; “Image and site” by Jas’ Elsner; “Untimely objects” byAra H. Merjian; “Max Ernst in Arizona” by Samantha Kavky;“Form as revolt” by Sebastian Zeidler; “Embodiments and artbeliefs” by Filippo Fimiani; “The theft of the goddess Amba Mata”by Deborah Stein; and contributions to “Lectures, Documentsand Discussions” by Gottfried Semper, Spyros Papapetros, ErwinPanofsky, Megan R. Luke, Francesco Paolo Adorno, and RemoGuidieri.

FRANCESCO PELL IZZ I i s A ssoc iate of Midd leAmer i c an Ethno logy at the Peabody Museum ofArchaeo logy and Ethno logy, Har vard Univers i t y.

PEABODY MUSEUM | JANUARY | 8 3⁄8 X 10 3⁄4 | 200 HALFTONES |360 PP. | PAPER: ISBN 978-0-87365-861-4 | $50.00X (£37.95 UK) |ANTHROPOLOGY / ART

Giorgio de Chirico, “Metaphysical Composit ion with Toys,” courtesy theMenil Collection, Houston.

p e a b o d y m u s e u m p r e s s

w w w . h u p . h a r v a r d . e d u � h a r v a r d u n i v e r s i t y p r e s s8 8

Page 91: Harvard University Press Fall 2010 Catalog

The Moche ofAncient PeruMedia and Messages

Jeffrey Quilter

Peru’s ancient Moche culture isrepresented in a magnificent col-lection of artifacts at Harvard’sPeabody Museum. In this richlyillustrated volume, Jeffrey Quilterpresents a fascinating introductionto this intriguing culture andexplores current thinking aboutMoche politics, history, society,and religion.

Quilter utilizes the Peabody’s collection as a means toinvestigate how the Moche used various media, particularlyceramics, to convey messages about their lives and beliefs. Hispresentation provides a critical examination and rethinking ofmany of the commonly held interpretations of Moche artifactsand their imagery, raising important issues of art production andits role in ancient and modern societies.

The most up-to-date monograph available on the Moche—and the first extensive discussion of the Peabody Museum’s col-lection of Moche ceramics—this volume provides anintroduction for the general reader and contributes to ongoingscholarly discussions. Quilter’s fresh reading of Moche visual

imagery raises new questions aboutthe art and culture of ancient Peru.

J EFFREY QU ILTER i s DeputyD i rec tor of the Peabody Museumof Archaeo logy and Ethno logy,Har vard Univers i t y.

PEABODY MUSEUM COLLECTIONS SERIESJANUARY | 8 X 8 1⁄2 |70 COLOR ILLUS.,15 HALFTONES | 128 PP. |PAPER: ISBN 978-0-87365-406-7 |$21.95X (£16.95 UK) | ARCHAEOLOGY /LATIN AMERICAN STUDIES

The CopanSculptureMuseumAncient Maya Ar tistr y in Stucco and Stone

Barbara W. Fash

The Copan Sculpture Museum in westernHonduras features the extraordinary stonecarvings of the ancient Maya city knownas Copan. The city’s sculptors produced some of the finestand most animated buildings and temples in the Mayaarea, in addition to stunning monolithic statues and altars.The ruins of Copan were named a UNESCO World Her-

itage site in 1980, and more than 150,000 tourists visit theancient city each year.

Opened in 1996, the Copan Sculpture Museum was ini-tiated as an international collaboration to preserve Copan’soriginal stone monuments. Its exhibits represent the best-known examples of building façades and sculptural achieve-ments from the ancient kingdom of Copan.

In this book, Barbara Fash—one of the principal cre-ators of the museum—tells the inside story of conceiving,designing, and building a local museum with global sig-nificance. Along with numerous illustrations anddetailed archaeological context for each exhibit inthe museum, the book provides a comprehensiveintroduction to the history and culture of theancient Maya and a model for working with localcommunities to preserve cultural heritage.

BARBARA W. FASH i s D i rec tor of the Corpusof Maya Hierog lyph i c Insc r ipt ions, PeabodyMuseum of Archaeo logy and Ethno logy, Har vardUnivers i t y.

PEABODY MUSEUM AND DAVID ROCKEFELLER CENTER FOR LATINAMERICAN STUDIES | DECEMBER | 7 X 9 |200 COLOR AND BLACK &WHITE ILLUS. | 216 PP. |PAPER: ISBN 978-0-87365-858-4 | $35.00X / OLACAR (£25.95 UK) |ARCHAEOLOGY / LATIN AMERICAN STUDIES

8 9w w w . h u p . h a r v a r d . e d u � h a r v a r d u n i v e r s i t y p r e s s

Page 92: Harvard University Press Fall 2010 Catalog

w w w . h u p . h a r v a r d . e d u � h a r v a r d u n i v e r s i t y p r e s s9 0

Kleos in a Minor KeyThe Homeric Education of a Little Prince

J. C. B. Petropoulos

As scholars have remarked, the word kleos in the Iliadand the Odyssey alike refers to something more sub-stantive and complex than “fame” or “glory.” Kleos dis-tinctly supposes an oral narrative—principally an “oralhistory,” a “life story” or ultimately an “oral tradition.”When broken down into its twin constituents, “words”and “actions” or “deeds,” a hero’s kleos serves to definehim as a fully gendered social being. This book is a med-itation on this concept as expressed and experienced in

the adult society Telemachosfind himself in. Kleos is theyardstick by which his psycho-logical change was appreciatedby Homer’s audiences. As thisbook shows through philologi-cal and interdisciplinary analy-sis, Prince Telemachos grows upin the course of the Telemachy andarguably even beyond (in book 24): hiseducation, which is conceived largely asan apprenticeship on land and sea,admits him gradually if unevenly to afull-fledged adult kleos—a kleos thatnonetheless necessarily remains minor incomparison to that of his father andother elders.

J . C . B . PETROPOULOS i s P ro fessor of Anc ientGreek L i te rature, Depar tment of Greek Phi lo logy,Democr i tean Univers i t y of Thrace, and Sen ior Fe l lowand Cha i rman of the Board of the Center for He l len i cS tud ies in Greece.

HELLENIC STUDIES 45 | MARCH | 6 X 9 |1 HALFTONE, 1 LINE ILLUS. | 230 PP. |PAPER: ISBN 978-0-674-05592-6 | $24.95X (£18.95 UK) | CLASSICS

The Master of SignsSigns and the Interpretation of Signs inHerodotus’ Histories

Alexander Hollmann

Readers of Herodotus’s Historiesare familiar with its reports ofbizarre portents, riddling ora-cles, and striking dreams. ButHerodotus draws our attentionto other types of signs too,beginning with human speechitself as a coded system that canmanipulate and be manipulated.Objects, gifts, artifacts, mark-ings, even the human body, areall capable of being investedwith meaning in the Historiesand Herodotus shows that con-ventionally and culturally deter-mined actions, gestures, and

ritual all need decoding. This book represents an unprecedentedexamination of signs and their interpreters, as well as the ter-minology Herodotus uses to describe sign transmission, recep-tion, and decoding. Through his control and involvement in thisprocess he emerges as a veritable “master of signs.”

ALEXANDER HOLLMANN i s A ss i s tant Professor ofthe C lass i c s at the Univers i t y of Wash ington .

HELLENIC STUDIES 48 | MARCH | 6 X 9 | 320 PP. |PAPER: ISBN 978-0-674-05588-9 | $27.50X (£20.95 UK) | CLASSICS

c e n t e r f o r h e l l e n i c s t u d i e s

Page 93: Harvard University Press Fall 2010 Catalog

The Epic Rhapsodeand His CraftHomeric Per formance in a Diachronic Perspective

Jose Gonzalez

The Epic Rhapsode and His Craft studies Homeric performancefrom archaic to Roman imperial times. It argues that oracularutterance, dramatic acting, and rhetorical delivery powerfullyelucidate the practice of epic rhapsodes. Attention to the waysin which these performance domains informed each other overtime reveals a shifting dynamic of competition and emulationamong rhapsodes, actors, and orators that shaped their texts andtheir crafts. A diachronic analysis of this web of influences illu-

minates fundamentalaspects of Homericpoetry: its inspirationand composition, thenotional fixity of itspoetic tradition, andthe performance-dri-ven textual fixationand writing of theHomeric poems. It alsoshows that rhapsodicpractice is best under-stood as an evolvingcombination of revela-tion, interpretation,recitation, and dra-matic delivery.

JOSE GONZALEZ i s A ss i s tant Professor of C las s i c a lS tud ies at Duke Univers i t y.

HELLENIC STUDIES 47 | MARCH | 6 X 9 | 350 PP. |PAPER: ISBN 978-0-674-05589-6 | $27.50X (£20.95 UK) | CLASSICS

Plato’s CounterfeitSophistsHåkan Tell

This book explores the place ofthe sophists within the Greek wis-dom tradition, and argues againsttheir almost universal exclusionfrom serious intellectual tradi-tions. By studying the sophistsagainst the backdrop of thearchaic Greek institutions of wis-dom, it is possible to detect con-siderable intellectual overlapbetween them and their prede-cessors. This book explores thecontinuity of this tradition, sug-gesting that the sophists’ intellec-tual balkanization in modernscholarship, particularly their lowstanding in comparison to thePresocratics, Platonists, and Aris-totelians, is a direct result of Plato’s condemnation of them andtheir practices. This book thus seeks to offer a revised history ofthe development of Greek philosophy, as well as of the poten-tial—yet never realized—courses it might have followed.

HÅKAN TELL i s A ss i s tant Professor of C las s i c s atDar tmouth Co l lege.

HELLENIC STUDIES 44 | MARCH | 6 X 9 | 285 PP. |PAPER: ISBN 978-0-674-05591-9 | $24.95X (£18.95 UK) | CLASSICS

w w w . h u p . h a r v a r d . e d u � h a r v a r d u n i v e r s i t y p r e s s � c e n t e r f o r h e l l e n i c s t u d i e s 9 1

Page 94: Harvard University Press Fall 2010 Catalog

9 2

Ecologies ofHumanFlourishingEdited by Donald K. Swearer

Prominent Buddhist scholar Donald Swearerposits that the future requires a radical shifttoward living in recognition of the interdepen-dence of all life forms and the consequent ethic of

communality and a lifestyle of moderation or “enoughness” thatflows from that recognition, which he calls “an ecology ofhuman flourishing.” In this volume, Swearer has assembledworld-class thinkers to explore and imagine several dimensionsof an ecology of human flourishing: economic, sociological, reli-gious, ethical, environmental, historical, and literary. The essaysaddress how notions of human flourishing, quality of life, andcommon good have been constructed and, in the contemporary

world, how they are illuminated or are challenged by issues ofdistributive justice, poverty and economic inequality, globalhealth, and environmental sustainability. With contributors rang-ing from ecoactivist Bill McKibben and medical anthropologistArthur Kleinman to transformative theologian Sallie McFagueand Malaysian critic of global injustice Chandra Muzzafar, thebook provides ethical and religious aspirations to remake theworld in the midst of the contradictions, injustices, and prob-lems of our daily lives and today’s global crises.

DONALD K . SWEARER i s D i s t ingu i shed Vi s i t ingProfessor of Buddhi s t S tud ies and D i rec tor of theCenter for the Study of Wor ld Re l ig ions at Har vardD iv in i ty S choo l .

RELIGIONS OF THEWORLD AND ECOLOGY |DECEMBER | 5 1⁄2 X 8 1⁄2 | 2 HALFTONES | 200 PP. |PAPER: ISBN 978-0-945454-45-8 | $23.95X (£17.95 UK) | RELIGION

PoemsThe Canon

Constantine CavafyTranslated by John Chioles

C. P. Cavafy (Konstantinos Petrou Kavafis) is oneof the most important Greek poets since antiquity.He was born, lived, and died in Alexandria(1863–1933), with brief periods spent in Eng-land, Constantinople, and Athens. Cavafy set inmotion the most powerful modernism in early

twentieth-century European poetry, exhibiting intriguing truthsabout eroticism, history, and philosophy—an inscrutable tri-umvirate that informs the Greek language and culture in all theirdiachrony. The Cavafy canon plays with the complexities ofironic Socratic thought, suffused with the honesty of unadorned

iambic verse. Based on a fifty-year continuous scholarly and lit-erary interaction with Cavafy’s poetry and its Greek and westernEuropean intertexts, this edition by John Chioles provides anexceptionally nuanced and the most authoritative translation ofthe complex linguistic registers of Cavafy’s canon into English.

JOHN CH IOLES i s P ro fessor of Comparat iveL i te rature at New York Univers i t y.

HARVARD EARLY MODERN AND MODERN GREEK LIBRARY 1 |DECEMBER | 5 1⁄4 X 8 | 420 PP. | ISBN 978-0-674-05326-7 |$29.95X (£22.95 UK) | POETRY

c e n t e r f o r t h e s t u d y o f w o r l d r e l i g i o n s

T H E H A R VA R D E A R LY M O D E R N A N D

M O D E R N G R E E K L I B R A R Y

is a pioneering facing-page translat ion

series offer ing readable modern Engl ish

translat ions of essential Greek l iterature

to both scholars and general readers based

on current research by leading scholars

in the f ield.

w w w . h u p . h a r v a r d . e d u � h a r v a r d u n i v e r s i t y p r e s s

h a r v a r d c l a s s i c s d e p a r t m e n t

Page 95: Harvard University Press Fall 2010 Catalog

Kleanthes andHabrokomeKonstantinos ManosTranslated and with an Introduction andNotes by Panagiotis Roilos

Kleanthes and Habrokome by KonstantinosManos, a Phanariot Greek high officer inlate-eighteenth/early-nineteenth-centuryRomania, is an important landmark in thereception of ancient Greek novel and pas-toral literature in modern Europe. Albeitneglected by modern scholarship, this workwas exceptionally popular among the literatiof the Greek diaspora at the beginning of thenineteenth century. First published in 1801and reprinted twice within ten years, Klean-thes and Habrokome was one of the mostsuccessful literary contributions to the dis-course of continuity within the Greek culture developed duringthe Enlightenment. As Roilos shows, the appearance of Manos’swork three years before the monumental edition of Heliodoros’sEthiopian Story (1804) by Adamantios Koraes (the most emi-nent figure of the Greek Enlightenment) marked a crucialmoment in the dialogue of nineteenth-century Greeks with theirancient literary heritage. Roilos brings to light this significant butforgotten work of Greek literature and offers the first systematicanalysis of its position within its broader cultural context as wellas of its relation to ancient Greek and synchronic European inter-texts.

PANAG IOT IS RO ILOS i s P ro fessor of Modern GreekStud ies and of Comparat ive L i te rature at Har vardUnivers i t y.

HARVARD EARLY MODERN AND MODERN GREEK LIBRARY 2 |MARCH | 5 1⁄4 X 8 | 220 PP. | ISBN 978-0-674-05594-0 |$35.00X / (£25.95 UK) | CLASSICS

The Shackles ofModernityWomen, Proper ty, and the Transition from the OttomanEmpire to the Greek State, 1750–1850

Evdoxios Doxiadis

This book explores the relationshipbetween women and property in theGreek lands and their broader socialposition in the century that culmi-nated with the establishment of thenational Greek state (1750–1850).Doxiadis focuses on the status andrights of Greek women in the laterOttoman period, the decade-longGreek War of Independence, and thefirst decades of the Greek state, seek-ing to reveal the impact that the pur-suit of modernization by the early Greek

governments had on women. Through the systematic examina-tion of numerous legal documents in notarial archives from fourdistinct regions (Naxos, Mykonos, Athens, and Leonidio), theposition of women in Greek societies of the period is illuminatedin all its complexity and regional diversity. Special emphasis isplaced on women’s ability in some areas to defend their propertyrights and be active economic agents. Although the Greek rev-olutionaries and the Greek state did not curtail the rights ofwomen with respect to property, the very institutions that werefundamental in the creation of the Greek state transformed theestablished relationship between women and property. Doxiadisshows that modernization proved to be an oppressive force forGreek women—though in a much more clandestine fashionthan perhaps expected in other European states.

EVDOX IOS DOX IAD IS i s Lec turer at theInternat iona l Center for He l len i c and Medi ter raneanStud ies , Athens.

CULTURAL POLITICS, SOCIOAESTHETICS, BEGINNINGS |MARCH | 5 1⁄2 X 8 1⁄2 | 32 TABLES | 380 PP. |ISBN 978-0-674-05593-3 | $55.00X (£40.95 UK) | HISTORY

w w w . h u p . h a r v a r d . e d u � h a r v a r d u n i v e r s i t y p r e s s � d e p a r t m e n t o f c l a s s i c s 9 3

Page 96: Harvard University Press Fall 2010 Catalog

w w w . h u p . h a r v a r d . e d u � h a r v a r d u n i v e r s i t y p r e s s9 4

How DemocracyWorksPolitical Institutions, Actors, and Arenas in LatinAmerican Policymaking

Edited by Carlos Scartascini,Ernesto Stein, andMariano Tommasi

In the past thirty years, democratic freedom and competitiveelectoral processes have taken hold as never before in LatinAmerica. This book zeroes in on the intricate workings of dem-ocratic institutions (such as political party systems and the leg-islature), the actors who participate in democratic systems (suchas governors, judges, bureaucrats, and other members of civilsociety), and the arenas in which political and policy interac-tions take place (which may be formal, such as the legislature,or informal). The focus is on how those institutions, actors, andarenas affect the policymaking processes of Latin Americancountries for better or worse. In its scope and complexity, thevolume moves well beyond stylized views of the political sys-tems in Latin America.

CARLOS SCARTASC IN I i s Sen ior Economist in theResearch Depar tment, Inter -Amer i c an Deve lopmentBank , USA . ERNESTO STE IN i s Reg iona l EconomicAdv i sor, Countr y Depar tment Cent ra l Amer i c a ,Mex i co, Panama, and Domin i c an Republ i c , Inter -Amer i c an Deve lopment Bank , USA . MAR IANOTOMMAS I i s Cha i rman of the Depar tment ofEconomics , Un iver s idad de San Andrés , Argent ina .

DAVID ROCKEFELLER CENTER FOR LATIN AMERICAN STUDIES/INTER-AMERICAN DEVELOPMENT BANK | SEPTEMBER | 6 X 9 |28 FIGURES, 29 TABLES | 350 PP. | PAPER: ISBN 978-1-59782-109-4 |$29.95X / (£22.95 UK) | POLITICS / LATIN AMERICAN STUDIES

Building CitiesNeighborhood Upgrading and Urban Quality of Life

Edited by Eduardo Rojas

This volume provides a synthesis of the lessons learned and chal-lenges confronted in implementing neighborhood improvementprograms, based on the practical experiences of designing, imple-menting, and evaluating these types of programs in the LatinAmerican and Caribbean (LAC) region. The book provides awide panorama of the most complex problems that the cities ofthe LAC region currently face and shows—with examples ofprojects under execution—that it is possible to solve themthrough the expansion of the scale of interventions. The volumeis structured in seven thematic chapters that present the “stateof the art” on the knowledge and challenges in each theme. Thebook is of interest to policymakers, government officials, practi-tioners, and scholars working in this field in the LAC region andaround the world.

EDUARDO ROJAS i s P r inc ipa l Urban Deve lopmentSpec ia l i s t at the Inter -Amer i c an Deve lopment Bank .

DAVID ROCKEFELLER CENTER FOR LATIN AMERICAN STUDIES /INTER-AMERICAN DEVELOPMENT BANK | SEPTEMBER | 7 1⁄2 X 9 |52 HALFTONES, 16 FIGURES, 21 TABLES, 7 MAPS | 250 PP. |PAPER: ISBN 978-1-59782-108-7 | $34.95X (£25.95 UK) |URBAN DESIGN / LATIN AMERICAN STUDIES

d a v i d r o c k e f e l l e r c e n t e r f o r l a t i n a m e r i c a n s t u d i e s

Page 97: Harvard University Press Fall 2010 Catalog

Portraits of anInvisible CountryThe Photographs of Jorge Mario Múnera

Edited by José Luis Falconi

In May 2003, Jorge Mario Múnera won the Latino and Latin American Art ForumPrize, which entitled him to produce and present an exhibit at the David Rocke-feller Center for Latin American Studies at Harvard University. By this time, Mún-era had already produced an important body of work, presenting even the farthestcorners of his native Colombia through his photographs of people and their way of life. This volume, which bears the name of theexhibit that he presented at Harvard in 2004, marks the culmination of a five-year project between the photographer and the cura-tor of the show, José Luis Falconi.

Renowned in his home country for being one of the most prolific and influential photographers of his generation, Jorge MarioMúnera was the first recipient of the National Photography Award in Colombia in 1998. Since then, numerous international recog-nitions have followed, chief among them, his appointment to the Andrés Bello Chair of the King Juan Carlos Center at New YorkUniversity.

Portraits of an Invisible Country is comprised of a booklet of essays by leading authorities in the field and a series of sixteen photoposters that showcase the photographer’s travels within Colombia and his careful depiction of his countrymen.

JOSÉ LU IS FALCON I i s A r t Forum Curator at the Dav id Rockefe l le r Center for Lat in Amer i c an Stud ies ,Har vard Univers i t y.

LATIN AMERICAN AND LATINO ART FORUM 1 | SEPTEMBER | 16 DETACHABLE POSTERSWITH BLACK &WHITE ILLUS. | 52 PP. |ISBN 978-0-674-05586-5 | $26.00X (£19.95 UK) | ART

Johnson After Three CenturiesNew Light on Texts and Contexts

Edited by Thomas A. Horrocks and Howard D. Weinbrot

Johnson After Three Centuries: New Light on Texts and Contexts examines several aspects of SamuelJohnson’s career through fresh perspectives and original interpretations by some of the best-knownand widely respected scholars of our time. Included are essays by James Basker, James Engell, NicholasHudson, Jack Lynch, and Allen Reddick.

THOMAS A . HORROCKS i s A ssoc iate L ibrar ian for Co l lec t ions, Houghton L ibrar y of Har vardUnivers i t y. HOWARD D. WE INBROT i s P ro fessor of Eng l i sh at the Univers i t y of Wiscons in , Madi son .

SEPTEMBER | 6 X 9 | 10 HALFTONES | 150 PP. | ISBN 978-0-9818858-4-1 | $30.00X (£22.95 UK) | LITERATURE

w w w . h u p . h a r v a r d . e d u � h a r v a r d u n i v e r s i t y p r e s s 9 5

h o u g h t o n l i b r a r y o f t h e h a r v a r d c o l l e g e l i b r a r y

Page 98: Harvard University Press Fall 2010 Catalog

w w w . h u p . h a r v a r d . e d u � h a r v a r d u n i v e r s i t y p r e s s9 6

d e p a r t m e n t o f c e l t i c l a n g u a g e s a n d l i t e r a t u r e s

Proceedings of theHarvard CelticColloquium, 28: 2008Edited by Kassandra Conley,Edyta Lehmann-Shriver, andSarah Zeiser

This volume includes: “The Influence of 19th century Antholo-gies of Celtic Music in Redefining Celtic Nationalism” by Gra-ham Aubrey; “A Reactionary Dimension in ProgressiveRevolutionary Theories?” by Olivier Coquelin; “The SpitefulTongue: Breton Song Practices and the Art of the Insult” byNatalie Franz; “Celtic Democracy” by D. Blair Gibson; “Pen-dragon’s Ancestors” by Natalie Ginoux; “When Historians StudyBreton Oral Ballads: A Cultural Approach” by Eva Guillorel;“The British Tristan Tradition” by Sabine Heinz; “Time and theTranslation of the Breton Laws” by Heather Laird; “Judas, HisSister, and the Miraculous Cock in the Middle Irish poem Crístro crochadh” by Christopher Leydon; “Se principen nominat :

Rhetorical Self-Fashioning and Epis-tolary Style in the Letters of OwainGwynedd” by Patricia Malone; and“Abduction, Swordplay, Monstersand Mistrust: Findabair, Gwen-hwyfa and the Restoration of Hon-our” by Sharon Paice MacLeod.

PROCEEDINGS OF THE HARVARD CELTICCOLLOQUIUM 28 |DECEMBER | 6 1⁄8 X 9 1⁄4 |19 HALFTONES | 224 PP. |ISBN 978-0-674-05596-4 |$32.95X (£24.95 UK) | LITERATURE

Proceedings of theHarvard CelticColloquium, 29: 2009Edited by Kassandra Conley,Erin Boon, Margaret Harrison,and Elizabeth Moore

This volume includes “Nations in Tune: the Influence of Irishmusic on the Breton Musical Record” by Yann Bevant; “Ethnic-ity, Geography, and the Passage of Dominion in the Mabinogiand Brut Y Brenhinedd” by Christina Chance; “RejectingMother’s Blessing: the Absence of the Fairy in the Welsh Searchfor National Identity” by Adam Coward; “Gwalarn: An Attemptto Renew Breton literature” by Gwendal Denez; “At the Cross-roads: World War One and the Shifting Roles of Men andWomen in Breton Ballad Song Practice” by Natalie Franz;“Apocryphal Sanctity in the Lives of Irish Saints” by Maire John-son; “‘An Dialog wtre Arzur Roe d’an Bretounet ha Guynglaff’and Its Connections with the Arthurian tradition” by Herve LeBihan; “A Walk on the Wild Side: Women, Men and Madness”by Edyta Lehmann; “The Early Establishment of Celtic Studiesin North American Universities” by Michael Linkletter; “‘TheMarshalled Fence of Battle of All the Men of Earth’: A Readingof Cú Chulainn’s First Recension ríastrad” by Elizabeth Moore;“Dreams of Medieval Scottish Nationhood: The Epic Case ofWilliam Wallace” by Kylie Murray; “‘Some of You Will CurseHer’: Women’s Fiction During the Irish-language Revival” byRiona Nic Congail; “Dating Peredur: New Light on Old Prob-lems” by Natalia I. Petrovskaia; “‘From the Shame You HaveDone’ : Comparing the stories of Blodeuedd and Bláthnait” bySarah Pfannenschmidt; “‘And There was a Fourth son Llefelys’:Narrative Structure and Variation in Cyfranc Lludd a Llefelys” byKelly Ann Randell; and “Fabricating Celts: How Iron Age Iberi-ans became Indo-Europeanized during the Franco Regime” byAaron Alzola Romero and Eduardo Sanchez-Moreno.

PROCEEDINGS OF THE HARVARD CELTIC COLLOQUIUM 29 |MARCH | 6 1⁄8 X 9 1⁄4 | 272 PP. | ISBN 978-0-674-05595-7 |$32.95X (£24.95 UK) | LITERATURE

KASSANDRA CONLEY,

ER IN BOON , MARGARET

HARR ISON , EL IZABETH

MOORE , EDYTA

LEHMANN-SHR IVER ,

AND SARAH ZE ISER are

Ph.D. candidates in Celtic

Languages and Literatures

at Harvard University.

Page 99: Harvard University Press Fall 2010 Catalog

My Dearest FriendLetters of Abigail and John Adams

Edited by Margaret A. Hoganand C. James TaylorForeword by Joseph J. Ellis

In 1762, John Adams penned a flirtatious note to “Miss Adorable,” the seventeen-year-old Abigail Smith. In 1801, Abigail wrote to wish her husband John a safe journey as heheaded home to Quincy after serving as president of the nation he helped create. Theletters that span these nearly forty years form the most signifi-cant correspondence—and reveal one of the most intriguing andinspiring partnerships—in American history.

“BECAUSE JOHN ADAMS’S WORK AS A CRITICAL PLAYER IN THE WAR

OF INDEPENDENCE FREQUENTLY TOOK HIM AWAY FROM HOME, HISCORRESPONDENCE WITH ABIGAIL (SOME 1,160 LETTERS BETWEEN

THEM HAVE SURVIVED) PROVIDES A WONDERFULLY VIVID ACCOUNT OF

THE MOMENTOUS ERA THEY LIVED THROUGH, UNDERSCORING THE

CHAOTIC, OFTEN IMPROVISATORY CIRCUMSTANCES THAT ATTENDED THE

BIRTH OF THE FLEDGLING NATION AND THE HARDSHIPS OF DAILY LIFE.”

—MICHIKO KAKUTANI, NEW YORK TIMES

“THE LETTERS REVEAL THE MAKING OF THE AMERICAN NATION, IN ALL

ITS CHAOS AND PASSION, FROM THE INSIDE…THE ADAMSES’ LETTERSARE SO ENJOYABLE BECAUSE THEY OFFER A WONDERFUL BREADTH OF

TOPICS, BREATHLESSLY JUMPING BETWEEN FLIRTATIOUS TEASING,GOSSIP ABOUT FRIENDS AND FAMILY, AND PHILOSOPHICAL AND

POLITICAL ARGUMENT.”

—ANDREA WULF, THE GUARDIAN

BELKNAP PRESS | CLOTH: OCTOBER 2007 / ISBN 978-0-674-02606-3 |NOVEMBER | 6 3⁄8 X 9 1⁄4 | 19 COLOR ILLUS., 9 HALFTONES | 528 PP. |PAPER: ISBN 978-0-674-05705-0 | $19.95 (£14.95 UK) |BIOGRAPHY

w w w . h u p . h a r v a r d . e d u � h a r v a r d u n i v e r s i t y p r e s s 9 7

p a p e r b a c k s

MARGARET A .

HOGAN is

Managing Editor of

the Adams Papers

at the Massachusetts Historical

Society. C . JAMES TAYLOR is

Editor in Chief of the Adams

Papers at the Massachusetts

Historical Society.

Page 100: Harvard University Press Fall 2010 Catalog

w w w . h u p . h a r v a r d . e d u � h a r v a r d u n i v e r s i t y p r e s s9 8

Galileo Goes to JailAnd Other Myths about Science and Religion

Edited by Ronald L. Numbers

A CHOICE OUTSTANDING ACADEMIC BOOK

The picture of science and religion at eachother’s throats persists in mainstream mediaand scholarly journals, but each chapter inGalileo Goes to Jail shows how much wehave to gain by seeing beyond the myths.

“THE AUTHORS NECESSARILY SPEND THE BULK

OF THEIR TIME DEBUNKING ATTACKS ON

RELIGION IN THE NAME OF SCIENCE, BUT THEY

ALSO CLEAR THE MUDDY WATERS LEFT BEHIND

WHEN PRO-RELIGION FORCES TRY TO OBSCURE

THE SCIENTIFIC RECORD…GIVEN ALL OF THE

POLEMICS PUBLISHED TODAY, THIS IS A BREATH

OF FRESH AIR.”

—RYAN T. ANDERSON, WEEKLY STANDARD

“[THIS BOOK WAS WRITTEN] WITH ORDINARY

READERS, NOT SPECIALISTS, IN MIND, MAKING

THIS A TRULY RARE BOOK: WHERE ELSE CAN YOU

FIND SUCH AUTHORITATIVE SCHOLARSHIP

DELIVERED SO ACCESSIBLY AND FAIRLY ON SUCH

AN IMPORTANT SUBJECT?”

—EDWARD B. DAVIS, BELIEF.NET

RONALD L . NUMBERS is HilldaleProfessor of the History of Science andMedicine, University of Wisconsin–Madison.

His books include The Crea t ion i s t s : F rom Sc ient i f i cC rea t ion i sm to In te l l i gent Des ign , Expanded Ed i t ion(Harvard).

CLOTH: MARCH 2009 / ISBN 978-0-674-03327-6 |NOVEMBER | 5 1⁄2 X 8 1⁄4 | 320 PP. |PAPER: ISBN 978-0-674-05741-8 | $17.95 (£13.95 UK) |SCIENCE / RELIGION

Healing SpacesThe Science of Place and Well-Being

Esther M. Sternberg, M.D.

Does the world make you sick? If the distractions and distor-tions around you, the jarring colors and sounds, could shake upthe healing chemistry of your mind, might your surroundingsalso have the power to heal you? This is the question EstherSternberg explores in Healing Spaces, a look at the marvelouslyrich nexus of mind and body, perception and place.

“WHAT STERNBERG DOES SO SKILLFULLY IS TO STITCH TOGETHER AN

EXPLANATION AS TO HOW SO MANY OF THE THINGS WE INTUITIVELY

FIND RELAXING, LIKE YOGA, OR SITTING BY THE SEA, OR IN A BRIGHT

AIRY ROOM, AFFECT HOW QUICKLY WE HEAL. SHE PROVIDES THE

SCIENCE TO BACK IT UP AND EXPLAINS IT SO ENGAGINGLY THAT IT’SHARD TO RESIST SHARING HER CONVICTION.”

—LINDA GEDDES, NEW SCIENTIST

“HEALING SPACES [IS] AN EXPLORATION OF ENVIRONMENTAL

INFLUENCES OVER THE BRAIN, THE BODY AND THE COURSE OF MENTAL

AND PHYSICAL DISEASE…ANYONE WHO HAS EVER FELT PEACE

DESCEND IN LOVELY SURROUNDINGS WILL FIND A FEW SEEDS OF

EXPLANATION IN HER BOOK.”

—ABIGAIL ZUGER, M.D., NEW YORK TIMES

ESTHER M. STERNBERG , M .D. , author of TheBa lance Wi th in : The S c i ence Connec t ing Hea l th andEmot ions , has done extensive research on brain-immuneinteractions and the effects of the brain’s stress response onhealth. She was on the faculty at Washington University,St. Louis, prior to joining the National Institutes of Healthin 1986.

BELKNAP PRESS | CLOTH: MAY 2009 / ISBN 978-0-674-03336-8 |SEPTEMBER | 5 1⁄2 X 8 1⁄4 | 352 PP. |PAPER: ISBN 978-0-674-05748-7 | $16.95 (£12.95 UK) |HEALTH / PSYCHOLOGY

Page 101: Harvard University Press Fall 2010 Catalog

To Serve God andWal-MartThe Making of Christian Free Enterprise

Bethany Moreton

A BOSTON PHOENIX BEST BOOK OF THE YEAR

WINNER OF THE 2010 OAH FREDERICK JACKSON TURNER AWARD

In the decades after World War II, evangelical Christianity nour-ished America’s devotion to free markets, free trade, and freeenterprise. The history of Wal-Mart uncovers a complex net-work that united Sun Belt entrepreneurs, evangelical employ-ees, Christian business students, overseas missionaries, andfree-market activists. Through the stories of people linked by theworld’s largest corporation, Bethany Moreton shows how aChristian service ethos powered capitalism at home and abroad.

“MORETON OFFERS NOVEL OBSERVATIONS ABOUT THE LURE OF WAL-MART. SHE EXPLAINS, FOR EXAMPLE, HOW THE COMPANY INVOKED

THE FUNDAMENTALIST CHRISTIAN TEACHINGS EMBRACED BY MANY OF

ITS EMPLOYEES TO FASHION A WORKING ENVIRONMENT THAT INDUCED

THEM TO WORK CONTENTEDLY FOR LOW WAGES AND PALTRY

BENEFITS…MORETON ARGUES THAT WALTON AND HIS FELLOW

EXECUTIVES QUICKLY RECOGNIZED THE ECONOMIC ADVANTAGE OF

WEAVING SPECIFIC STRANDS OF THE OZARK REGION’SFUNDAMENTALIST BELIEF SYSTEM INTO THEIR CORPORATE STRATEGY.”

—ROBERT FRANK, NEW YORK TIMES BOOK REVIEW

“THIS BOOK OFFERS READERS AN ENGAGING ACCOUNT OF HOW A

DISCOUNT FIVE-AND-DIME STORE CONCEIVED IN THE RURAL AMERICAN

OZARKS BECAME THE TEMPLATE FOR SERVICE WORK IN THE GLOBAL

ECONOMY.”

—REBEKAH PEEPLES MASSENGILL,TIMES HIGHER EDUCATION

BETHANY MORETON is Assistant Professor of Historyand Women’s Studies at the University of Georgia.

CLOTH: MAY 2009 / ISBN 978-0-674-03322-1 |NOVEMBER | 6 1⁄8 X 9 1⁄4 | 12 HALFTONES, 1 MAP | 392 PP. |PAPER: ISBN 978-0-674-05740-1 | $17.95 (£13.95 UK) |CURRENT AFFAIRS / BUSINESS

Total CureThe Antidote to the Health Care Crisis

Harold S. Luft

Guaranteeing that everyone is insured does notcreate a system with the quality of care patientswant, the flexibility clinicians need, and theinternal dynamics to continually improve thevalue of health care. Hal Luft presents a com-prehensive new proposal, SecureChoice, whichdoes all that while providing affordable healthinsurance for every American.

“BRILLIANT AND BADLY UNDERAPPRECIATED…LUFTSEEMS TO RECOGNIZE THAT ADVANCES IN MEDICAL

TECHNOLOGY MAKE THE TRADITIONAL APPROACH TO

PRIVATE HEALTH INSURANCE LESS VIABLE. YET HE

ALSO SEES THE VALUE IN PROMOTING CONSTRUCTIVE

COMPETITION…WITH THE [UNIVERSAL COVERAGE

POOL] IN PLACE, NO ONE WILL EVER GO BANKRUPT

DUE TO ILLNESS; PRIVATE INSURERS AND PROVIDERS

WILL COMPETE ON THE BASICS OF COST AND

QUALITY; AND THE HEALTH SYSTEM WILL GET BETTER

AND CHEAPER OVER TIME.”

—REIHAN SALAM, FORBES.COM

“SECURECHOICE IS AN INGENIOUS, CAREFULLYCONSTRUCTED PROPOSAL…[TOTAL CURE]PROVID[ES] BOTH AN IMPORTANT NEW HEALTH CARE

REFORM OPTION AND AN ILLUMINATING TUTORIAL ON THE ISSUES AT

STAKE.”

—SAMUEL Y. SESSIONS,JOURNAL OF THE AMERICAN MEDICAL ASSOCIATION

HAROLD S . LUFT is Director of the Palo Alto MedicalFoundation Research Institute and Caldwell B. EsselstynProfessor of Health Policy and Health Economics, Emeritus,at the University of California, San Francisco.

CLOTH: OCTOBER 2008 / ISBN 978-0-674-03210-1 |OCTOBER | 5 1⁄2 X 8 1⁄4 | 7 LINE ILLUS., 2 TABLES | 336 PP.PAPER: ISBN 978-0-674-05736-4 | $17.95 (£13.95 UK)MEDICINE / ECONOMICS

w w w . h u p . h a r v a r d . e d u � h a r v a r d u n i v e r s i t y p r e s s 9 9

Page 102: Harvard University Press Fall 2010 Catalog

w w w . h u p . h a r v a r d . e d u � h a r v a r d u n i v e r s i t y p r e s s1 0 0

HadrianEmpire and Conflict

Thorsten Opper

Even in the panoply of Roman history,Hadrian stands out. Emperor from CE 117 to138, he was at once a benevolent ruler anda ruthless military leader, known for his rest-less and ambitious nature, his interest inarchitecture, and his passion for Greek cul-ture. This book moves beyond the familiarimage of Hadrian to offer a new appraisal ofthis Emperor’s contradictory personality, hisexploits and accomplishments, his rule, andhis military role, against the backdrop of histwenty-one-year reign.

“BRING[S] TOGETHER ARTIFACTS FROM AROUND

THE WORLD, INCLUDING STUNNING SCULPTURES,BRONZES, COINS, MOSAICS, AND FINE

INTERPRETIVE TEXTS ABOUT THE MAN WHO WAS

EMPEROR OF ROME FROM 117 CE TO 138 CE

…[A] STRIKING, BEAUTIFULLY ILLUSTRATED

BOOK.”

—JOAN W. GARTLAND, LIBRARY JOURNAL

“[AN] EXCELLENT AND LAVISHLY ILLUSTRATED

BOOK…HIGHLY RECOMMENDED AND

ASTONISHING VALUE FOR MONEY.”

—ANDREW JACK, CULTUREKIOSQUE.COM

THORSTEN OPPER is a curator in theDepartment of Greek and Roman Antiquities at the BritishMuseum. He has published work on ancient sculpture andeighteenth-century antiquarianism.

CLOTH: SEPTEMBER 2008 / ISBN 978-0-674-03095-4 |NOVEMBER | 9 X 11 3⁄8 | 200 COLOR ILLUS. | 224 PP. |PAPER: ISBN 978-0-674-05742-5 | $21.95 / NA |BIOGRAPHY

Arthur MillerChristopher Bigsby

A CHOICE OUTSTANDING ACADEMIC TITLE

This is the long-awaited biography of one of the twentieth cen-tury’s greatest playwrights, Arthur Miller, whose postwar decadeof work earned him international critical and popular acclaim.Christopher Bigsby’s gripping, meticulously researched biogra-phy, based on boxes of papers made available to him beforeMiller’s death, examines his refusal to name names before thenotorious House on Un-American Activities Committee, offersnew insights into Miller’s marriage to Marilyn Monroe, andsheds new light on how their relationship informed Miller’s sub-sequent great plays.

“THANKS TO BIGSBY’S RESEARCH, PARTICULARLY INTO PREVIOUSLY

UNSEEN MATERIAL, HIS ACCOUNT OF MILLER TRYING TO HANG ON TO

HIS SOUL IN MIDCENTURY AMERICA SHOWS THAT HE WAS LARGE NOT

LEAST IN HIS CONTRADICTIONS…WHAT THE BOOK MAKES NEWLY

CLEAR, THOUGH, IS HOW MUCH OF MILLER’S WORK REFLECTS HIS

OWN PERSONAL STRUGGLES.”

—JEREMY MCCARTER, NEW YORK TIMES BOOK REVIEW

“BIGSBY’S BIOGRAPHY IS SO EFFECTIVE BECAUSE IT MANAGES TO

LOCATE MILLER’S ART IN TERMS BOTH OF THE PROGRESSION OF HIS

IDEALISM AND THE REGRESSIONS OF HIS ACTUAL EXPERIENCE. THERE

CAN’T BE MANY WRITERS WHO APPEARED TO LIVE SO MUCH AT THE

CENTER OF THEIR TIMES AND WHO SUFFERED SO MUCH FROM THAT

SEEMING CENTRALITY.”

—ANDREW O’HAGAN, LONDON REVIEW OF BOOKS

CHR ISTOPHER B IGSBY is Professor of AmericanStudies and Director of the Arthur Miller Centre at theUniversity of East Anglia.

CLOTH: MAY 2009 / ISBN 978-0-674-03505-8 |NOVEMBER | 6 3⁄8 X 9 1⁄4 | 44 HALFTONES | 776 PP. |PAPER: ISBN 978-0-674-05708-1 | $19.95 / USA |BIOGRAPHY

Page 103: Harvard University Press Fall 2010 Catalog

TheodorW.AdornoOne Last Genius

Detlev ClaussenTranslated by Rodney Livingstone

WINNER OF THE UNGAR GERMAN TRANSLATION AWARD

He was famously hostile to biography as a literary form. And yetthis life of Adorno by one of his last students is far more than lit-erary in its accomplishments, giving us our first clear look athow the man and his moment met to create “critical theory.” Anintimate picture of the quintessential twentieth-century transat-lantic intellectual, the book is also a window on the cultural fer-ment of Adorno’s day—and its ongoing importance in our own.

“CLAUSSEN IS ILLUMINATING ON HIS SUBJECT’S POLITICS, CULTURALHERITAGE, HISTORICAL CONTEXT, MUSICOLOGY, INTELLECTUALLIAISONS AND REFLECTIONS ON THE CULTURE INDUSTRY…THEODOR W. ADORNO: ONE LAST GENIUS IS A STRENUOUSLY

INTELLECTUAL BIOGRAPHY, THE ONLY SORT THE MASTER HIMSELF

MIGHT JUST HAVE APPROVED, IN WHICH THE BARE FACTS OF HIS LIFE

ALWAYS COME TO US INTERWOVEN WITH HISTORICAL CURRENTS AND

PHILOSOPHICAL WRANGLES.”

—TERRY EAGLETON, LONDON REVIEW OF BOOKS

“CLAUSSEN, A STUDENT OF ADORNO’S, HAS WRITTEN WHAT HAS BEEN

HAILED AS AMONG THE BEST BOOKS ON ITS FAMOUSLY RECALCITRANT

SUBJECT.”

—BRIAN SHOLIS, BOOKFORUM

DETLEV CLAUSSEN is a journalist and a Professor ofSocial Theory, Culture, and Sociology at the University ofHanover. RODNEY L IV INGSTONE is ProfessorEmeritus in German Studies at the University ofSouthampton. He is well known as a translator of books byWalter Benjamin, Theodor W. Adorno, and Max Weber,among others.

BELKNAP PRESS | CLOTH: APRIL 2008 / ISBN 978-0-674-02618-6 |OCTOBER | 6 1⁄8 X 9 1⁄4 | 19 HALFTONES | 464 PP. |PAPER: ISBN 978-0-674-05713-5 | $22.95 (£16.95 UK) |BIOGRAPHY

Samuel JohnsonA Biography

Peter Martin

RUNNER-UP, THE ATLANTIC BOOKS OF THE YEAR

The Johnson that emerges from this enthrallingbiography is still the foremost figure of his age,but a more rebellious, unpredictable, flawed,and sympathetic figure than has been previouslyknown.

“MODERN BIOGRAPHERS ARE AWARE OF THE

COMPETITION. THEY HAVE TO WRITE A FIRST-RATEBOOK ABOUT JOHNSON OR HEAR FROM CRITICS THAT

THEY’VE FOOLISHLY ENTERED THE WRONG LEAGUE.AND A NUMBER OF SCHOLARS, NOTABLY PAULFUSSELL AND W. JACKSON BATE, HAVE GIVEN US

REMARKABLE PORTRAITS. THEY’RE NOW JOINED BY

PETER MARTIN [IN]…A DEEPLY FELT, BEAUTIFULLYWRITTEN ACCOUNT OF A PERSONALITY ABOUT WHOM

WE CANNOT KNOW ENOUGH.”

—GEORGE SIM JOHNSTON,WALL STREET JOURNAL

“A LIVELY NEW BIOGRAPHY, A BOOK WELL SEASONED

WITH GOOD STORIES, MOST OF WHICH DO NOT SEEK

ALWAYS TO SHOW THE DOCTOR IN A BETTER LIGHT.”

—ANDREW O'HAGAN,NEW YORK REVIEW OF BOOKS

PETER MART IN has taught English literature on bothsides of the Atlantic and is the author of A L i fe o f JamesBoswe l l and editor of Samue l Johnson : Se le c tedWr i t ings , A Tercentenar y Ce lebra t ion (Harvard).

BELKNAP PRESS | CLOTH: SEPTEMBER 2008 / ISBN 978-0-674-03160-9 |NOVEMBER | 6 1⁄8 X 9 1⁄4 | 34 HALFTONES, 2 MAPS | 640 PP. |PAPER: ISBN 978-0-674-05737-1 | $19.95 / NA |BIOGRAPHY

w w w . h u p . h a r v a r d . e d u � h a r v a r d u n i v e r s i t y p r e s s 1 0 1

Page 104: Harvard University Press Fall 2010 Catalog

Seven Deadly SinsA Very Par tial List

Aviad KleinbergTranslated by Susan Emanuel incollaboration with the author

Every culture has its own favorite list of tres-passes. Perhaps the most influential of thesewas drawn up by the Church in late antiq-uity: the Seven Deadly Sins. Pride, sloth,gluttony, envy, anger, lust, and greed are notforbidden acts but the passions that lead usinto temptation. Aviad Kleinberg, one of themost prominent public intellectuals in Israel,examines the arts of sinning and of fingerpointing. After all, what is wrong with a lit-tle sloth?

“AN INTELLECTUAL GEM THAT INTRODUCES THE

READER TO A NEW WORLD OF IDEAS. IT IS A

THOUGHT-PROVOKING AND PASSIONATE

BOOK…KLEINBERG’S HUMOR AND LEARNING

INVITE THE READER TO A JOURNEY OF SELF

EXPLORATION AND TO A REEXAMINATION OF

THE SOURCES OF EVIL.”

—TIMEOUT ISRAEL

“[A] LIVELY AND ENGAGING ESSAY

COLLECTION.”

—J. COURTNEY SULLIVAN,NEW YORK TIMES BOOK

REVIEW

AV IAD KLE INBERG is Professorof History at Tel Aviv University and

the author of F le sh Made Word : Sa in t s ’S to r i e s and the Weste rn Imag ina t ion

(Harvard).

BELKNAP PRESS | CLOTH: NOVEMBER 2008 /ISBN 978-0-674-03141-8 | OCTOBER | 5 1⁄2 X 8 1⁄4 | 208 PP. |PAPER: ISBN 978-0-674-05732-6 | $16.95 (£12.95 UK) |RELIGION

The Triumph of MusicThe Rise of Composers, Musicians and Their Ar t

Tim Blanning

A distinguished historian chronicles the rise of music and musi-cians in the West from lowly balladeers to masters employed byfickle patrons, to the great composers of genius, to today’s rockstars. How, he asks, did music progress from subordinate statusto its present position of supremacy among the creative arts?

“THE TRIUMPH OF MUSIC SUCCEEDS IN ITS GOAL OF DESCRIBING

MUSIC AS AN INSTRUMENT OF CULTURAL AND POLITICAL CHANGE.”

— JAMES PENROSE, NEW CRITERION

“THE POSITION OF MUSICIANS IN SOCIETY AND THE MECHANISMS BY

WHICH THEY REACH THEIR AUDIENCES ARE EXPLORED IN FASCINATING

DEPTH. THE BOOK IS NOT ABOUT MUSIC ITSELF, BUT ABOUT ITS

CREATORS AND CONSUMERS. BLANNING EVOKES THE LIFE OF THE

EIGHTEENTH-CENTURY MUSICIAN WITH MARVELOUS CLARITY; HAYDN

IS PARTICULARLY WELL TREATED, AND THE SHIFTING STATUS OF

MUSICIANS IN THE REVOLUTIONARY PERIOD IS HELD UNDER THE

HISTORIAN’S SHARP GAZE. AS A SOCIAL HISTORY OF MUSIC IN THE

PERIOD FROM BACH TO WAGNER, THE BOOK IS PENETRATING AND

RICHLY DOCUMENTED. THERE ARE FASCINATING NUGGETS OF

INFORMATION THROUGHOUT, ILLUMINATING BUT NOT DETRACTING

FROM THE CHRONICLE OF MUSICIANS AND THE RESPONSES OF

AUDIENCES, POLITICIANS, AND CRITICS.”

—HUGH MACDONALD, TIMES LITERARY SUPPLEMENT

T IM BLANN ING is Professor of Modern European Historyat the University of Cambridge and the author of ThePursu i t o f G lo r y : Europe 1648–1815 .

BELKNAP PRESS | CLOTH: NOVEMBER 2008 / ISBN 978-0-674-03104-3 |NOVEMBER | 6 1⁄8 X 9 1⁄4 | 89 HALFTONES, 2 TABLES | 432 PP. |PAPER: ISBN 978-0-674-05709-8 | $19.95 / OBE |HISTORY

w w w . h u p . h a r v a r d . e d u � h a r v a r d u n i v e r s i t y p r e s s1 0 2

Page 105: Harvard University Press Fall 2010 Catalog

A History of theArab PeoplesAlbert HouraniWith a New Afterword by Malise Ruthven

Upon its publication in 1991, Albert Hourani’s masterwork washailed as the definitive story of Arab civilization and becameboth a bestseller and an instant classic. In a panoramic viewencompassing twelve centuries of Arab history and culture,Hourani brilliantly illuminated the people and events that havefundamentally shaped the Arab world.

Now this seminal book is available in an expanded sec-ond edition. Noted Islamic scholar Malise Ruthven brings thestory up to date from the mid-1980s, including such events asthe Gulf War; civil unrest in Algeria; the change of leadership inSyria, Morocco, and Jordan; and the aftermath of the events ofSeptember 11, 2001.

PRAISE FOR THE FIRST EDITION:“A SPLENDID ACHIEVEMENT…WRITTEN WITH JUST THE RIGHT MIX OF

EMPATHY AND SENSITIVITY, AND A FEEL FOR THE IRONY OF HUMAN

HISTORY. THIS IS HISTORY IN THE GRAND STYLE. IT CAN LEAD TO A

BETTER UNDERSTANDING OF THE ARABS, PAST AND PRESENT.”

—L. CARL BROWN, NEW YORK TIMES BOOK REVIEW

“HERE AT LAST IS A GENUINELY READABLE, GENUINELY RESPONSIVE

HISTORY OF THE ARABS.”

—EDWARD W. SAID, LOS ANGELES TIMES BOOK REVIEW

ALBERT HOURAN I was Emeritus Fellow, St. Antony’sCollege, Oxford. He died in 1993. MAL ISE RUTHVEN isa former editor with the BBC Arabic Service and WorldService in London and is the author of I s lam in the Wor ldand I s lam: A Ver y Shor t In t roduc t ion .

BELKNAP PRESS | CLOTH: APRIL 2003 / ISBN 978-0-674-01017-8 |NOVEMBER | 6 1⁄8 X 9 1⁄4 | 32 HALFTONES, 13 MAPS | 624 PP. |PAPER: ISBN 978-0-674-05819-4 | $18.95 (£14.95 UK) | HISTORY

Paris from theGround UpJames H. S. McGregor

James H. S. McGregor brings multiple per-spectives into focus throughout this concise,unique history of the City of Light.

“IN JAMES H. S. MCGREGOR’S PARIS FROM

THE GROUND UP—WHICH OFFERS AN

INFORMATIVE HISTORY OF THE CITY’S ART AND

ARCHITECTURE—THE EIFFEL TOWER

NECESSARILY [OCCUPIES] ONLY FOUR

PAGES…BUT THOSE FOUR PAGES ARE

INVALUABLE…THIS INSIGHT IS TYPICAL OF

MCGREGOR, WHO…IS AT HIS BEST WHEN

ELABORATING ON THE TECHNICAL ASPECTS OF

PARIS’S BUILDINGS.”

—CAROLINE WEBER,NEW YORK TIMES BOOK REVIEW

“MCGREGOR’S EXCELLENT FROM THE GROUND

UP SERIES TREATS THE CITY AS A PALIMPSEST,SUBSTITUTING SPACE FOR TIME AND ALLOWING

THE READER TO EXPLORE THE HISTORY OF A

PLACE WHILE WANDERING ITS STREETS. HERE HE

TRACES THE STORY OF PARIS, DESCRIBING THE

REMNANTS OF A LONG HISTORY THAT ARE, FORTHE MOST PART, BURIED DEEP BENEATH THE CITY

STREETS.”

—LONDON REVIEW OF BOOKS

JAMES H . S . MCGREGOR is Professor and Co-Head ofthe Department of Comparative Literature at the Universityof Georgia. He is the author of Rome f rom the Ground Up ,Ven i ce f rom the Ground Up , and Wash ington f rom theGround Up (all from Harvard).

BELKNAP PRESS | FROMTHE GROUND UP |CLOTH: APRIL 2009 / ISBN 978-0-674-03316-0 |NOVEMBER | 5 3⁄4 X 9 |105 COLOR ILLUS., 30 HALFTONES, 10 MAPS | 352 PP. |PAPER: ISBN 978-0-674-05738-8 | $17.95 (£13.95 UK) |HISTORY / TRAVEL

w w w . h u p . h a r v a r d . e d u � h a r v a r d u n i v e r s i t y p r e s s 1 0 3

Page 106: Harvard University Press Fall 2010 Catalog

w w w . h u p . h a r v a r d . e d u � h a r v a r d u n i v e r s i t y p r e s s1 0 4

On the Originof StoriesEvolution, Cognition, and Fiction

Brian Boyd

A NEW ZEALAND LISTENER

BEST BOOK OF THE YEAR

A distinguished scholar offers the first com-prehensive account of the evolutionary ori-gins of art and storytelling. Brian Boydexplains why we tell stories, how our mindsare shaped to understand them, and whatdifference an evolutionary understanding ofhuman nature makes to stories we love.

“NO ONE THINKS ON THIS SCALE ANYMORE…BOYD’S TREATMENT IS ENGROSSING, ASELEGANT IN THE WRITING AS THE REASONING. ITOFFERS A NEW INSIGHT INTO THE QUESTION OF

WHY SOME WORKS [OF FICTION] SPEAK TO

AUDIENCES ACROSS CULTURES AND

GENERATIONS…WHATEVER YOUR OPINION OF

DERRIDA, BOYD OFFERS ABSOLUTION TO ALL

LOVERS OF FICTION.”

—LAURA DIETZ,TIMES LITERARY SUPPLEMENT

“BOYD HAS PRODUCED A CHALLENGING PIECE

OF CRITICAL THEORY, WHICH MIGHT WELL

HERALD THE RETURN TO NATURE OF WHICH

CULTURAL CRITICISM IS IN SUCH SORE NEED.”

—TERRY EAGLETON,LONDON REVIEW OF BOOKS

BR IAN BOYD , University Distinguished Professor in theDepartment of English, University of Auckland, is the world’sforemost authority on the works of Nabokov.

BELKNAP PRESS | CLOTH: MAY 2009 / ISBN 978-0-674-03357-3 |NOVEMBER | 6 1⁄8 X 9 1⁄4 | 14 HALFTONES | 560 PP. |PAPER: ISBN 978-0-674-05711-1 | $19.95 (£14.95 UK) |LITERATURE / SCIENCE

The Diversity of LifeEdward O. Wilson

Edward O. Wilson reflects on the crucible of evolution and howthe living world became diverse—and how humans are destroy-ing that diversity. Unparalleled in its range and depth, Wilson’smasterwork is essential reading for those who care about pre-serving the world’s biological variety and ensuring our planet’shealth.

“WE NEED PROPHETS TO SHAKE THE SOULS AND GRAB THE ATTENTION

OF THOSE WHO HAVE EYES BUT SEE NOT. THE DIVERSIT Y OF LIFE IS A

DEFT AND THOROUGHLY SUCCESSFUL MIXTURE OF INFORMATION AND

PROPHECY.”

—STEPHEN JAY GOULD, NATURE

“WILSON’S IS STILL THE BEST WORK WE ARE EVER LIKELY TO HAVE ON

THE TANGLED, EVER-CHANGING RELATIONSHIPS THAT ALL SPECIES ON

THE PLANET HAVE WITH ONE ANOTHER—AND WHY THE PRESERVATION

OF THE SAME BIOLOGICAL DIVERSITY THAT SPARKS OUR CURIOSITY

AND ENRICHES OUR SPIRIT MAY ALSO BE THE KEY TO OUR SURVIVAL.”

—T. H. WATKINS, WASHINGTON POST BOOK WORLD

“IN THIS BOOK [WILSON] STOPS ASKING WHAT BIOLOGY DOES TO

HUMANS, AND ASKS INSTEAD WHAT WE HUMANS ARE DOING TO

BIOLOGY.”

—DAVID PAPINEAU, NEW YORK TIMES BOOK REVIEW

EDWARD O. WILSON is Pellegrino UniversityProfessor, Emeritus, at Harvard University. In addition totwo Pulitzer Prizes (one of which he shares with BertHölldobler), Wilson has won many scientific awards,including the National Medal of Science and the CrafoordPrize of the Royal Swedish Academy of Sciences.

BELKNAP PRESS | QUESTIONS OF SCIENCE |CLOTH: 1992 / ISBN 978-0-674-21298-5 |NOVEMBER | 6 1⁄8 X 9 1⁄4 | 50 LINE ILLUS., 3 MAPS,64 COLOR PHOTOGRAPHS ON A 16-PAGE INSERT,3 COLOR ILLUS. ON A 2-PAGE INSERT | 432 PP. |PAPER: ISBN 978-0-674-05817-0 | $21.95 / COBEE |SCIENCE

Page 107: Harvard University Press Fall 2010 Catalog

Beyond Terror andMartyrdomThe Future of the Middle East

Gilles KepelTranslated by Pascale Ghazaleh

A CHOICE OUTSTANDING ACADEMIC TITLE

Since 2001, two dominant worldviews have clashed in theglobal arena: a neoconservative nightmare of an insidious Islamicterrorist threat to civilized life, and a jihadist myth of martyr-dom through the slaughter of infidels. Beyond Terror and Mar-tyrdom sounds the alarm to the West and to Islam that both ofthese exhausted narratives are bankrupt—productive neither ofdemocratic change in the Middle East nor of unity in Islam.

“GILLES KEPEL…[HAS] DONE MORE THAN MOST WRITERS TO OPEN

THE MINDS OF WESTERN READERS TO THE WORLD OF ISLAM…BEYOND TERROR AND MART YRDOM IS A STRONG CRITIQUE OF WHAT

HE CALLS THE TWO ‘GRAND NARRATIVES’ THAT HAVE CREATED SO

MUCH HAVOC IN THE MIDDLE EAST, AND BY EXTENSION IN EUROPETOO.”

—IAN BURUMA, NEW YORK REVIEW OF BOOKS

“THIS BOOK, FROM ONE OF FRANCE’S SHREWDEST INTERPRETERS OF

THE MUSLIM WORLD, PROVIDES A HIGHLY READABLE END-OF-TERMCONSPECTUS OF THE SUBSEQUENT VIOLENT ENCOUNTER BETWEEN

AMERICA AND THE JIHADISTS. IT ALSO OFFERS AN INTRIGUING

ARGUMENT. IN GILLES KEPEL’S TELLING, IT IS NOT ONLY MR. BUSH

WHOSE STRATEGY FAILED AFTER SEPTEMBER 11TH. OSAMA BIN

LADEN’S STRATEGY FAILED TOO.”

—THE ECONOMIST

GILLES KEPEL is Professor and Chair of Middle EastStudies at the Institute of Political Studies in Paris. He isthe author of The War for Mus l im Minds : I s lam and theWest and J ihad : The Tra i l o f Po l i t i ca l I s lam and coeditorof A l Qaeda in I t s Own Words (all from Harvard).

BELKNAP PRESS | CLOTH: NOVEMBER 2008 / ISBN 978-0-674-03138-8 |OCTOBER | 5 1⁄2 X 8 1⁄4 | 336 PP. |PAPER: ISBN 978-0-674-05731-9 | $17.95 (£13.95 UK) |CURRENT AFFAIRS

ForgottenWarsFreedom and Revolution in Southeast Asia

Christopher Bayly and Tim Harper

After the fall of the atomic bomb Asia wasdominated by the British. Yet within a fewviolent years, British power in the regionwould crumble, and independent nationswould struggle into existence. ChristopherBayly and Tim Harper show howWorld WarII never really ended in these ravaged Asianlands, but instead continued in bloody civilwars and insurrections.

“[A] COMPELLING BOOK…THE AUTHORS WRITE

THAT ‘THE END OF EMPIRE IS NOT A PRETTY

THING IF EXAMINED TOO CLOSELY,’ BUT WHEN

EXAMINED SO ABLY IT IS CERTAINLY

FASCINATING.”

—PHILIP DELVES BROUGHTON,WALL STREET JOURNAL

“FORGOTTEN WARS MOVINGLY BRINGS OUT THE

TRAVAILS OF ORDINARY PEOPLE WHO GOT

CAUGHT UP WITHIN A VICIOUS CYCLE OF

POLITICAL TURMOIL, ECONOMIC DEPRIVATION,AND VIOLENCE. THIS IS A ‘MUST READ’ FORTHOSE INTERESTED IN HISTORIES OF BRITISH

IMPERIALISM AND DECOLONIZATION IN ASIA.”

—HAIMANTI ROY,JOURNAL OF BRITISH STUDIES

CHR ISTOPHER BAYLY is Vere Harmsworth Professor ofImperial and Naval History at the University of Cambridge,and a Fellow of St. Catherine’s College. T IM HARPER is aSenior Lecturer in History at the University of Cambridge,and a Fellow of Magdalene College. They are the authors ofForgot ten A rmies : The Fa l l o f Br i t i sh As ia , 1941–1945(Harvard).

BELKNAP PRESS | CLOTH: MAY 2007 / ISBN 978-0-674-02153-2 |OCTOBER | 6 1⁄8 X 9 1⁄4 | 16 HALFTONES | 704 PP. |PAPER: ISBN 978-0-674-05707-4 | $19.95 * / USA | HISTORY

w w w . h u p . h a r v a r d . e d u � h a r v a r d u n i v e r s i t y p r e s s 1 0 5

Page 108: Harvard University Press Fall 2010 Catalog

w w w . h u p . h a r v a r d . e d u � h a r v a r d u n i v e r s i t y p r e s s1 0 6

The Last ofthe MohicansJames Fenimore CooperIntroduction by Wayne Franklin

Set in 1757 during the Frenchand Indian War, as Britain andFrance fought for control ofNorth America, The Last of theMohicans is a historical novel

and a rousing adventure story. It is also, WayneFranklin argues in his introduction, a probing exam-ination of the political and cultural contest takingshape more than half a century later in the author’sown day as European settlement continued torelentlessly push Native Americans westward. TheJohn Harvard Library edition reproduces the

authoritative text of the novel from The Writ-ings of James Fenimore Cooper, published bythe State University of New York Press.

WAYNE FRANKL IN is Head of the EnglishDepartment at the University of Connecticut.He is the author of several books, includingJames Fen imore Cooper : The Ear l y Year s .

BELKNAP PRESS |THE JOHN HARVARD LIBRARY |JANUARY | 5 1⁄2 X 8 1⁄4 | 548 PP. |PAPER: ISBN 978-0-674-05714-2 |$10.95 (£8.95 UK) |LITERATURE

Common SenseThomas PaineIntroduction by Alan Taylor

“In Common Sense a writer found hismoment to change the world,” Alan Taylorwrites in his introduction. When Paine’sattack on the British mixed constitution ofkings, lords, and commons was publishedin January 1776, fighting had alreadyerupted between British troops and Amer-ican Patriots, but many Patriots still balkedat seeking independence. “By discreditingthe sovereign king,” Taylor argues, “Painemade independence thinkable—as he relo-cated sovereignty from a royal family to thecollective people of a republic.” Paine’sAmerican readers could conclude that they

stood at “the center of a new and coming world of utopianpotential.” The John Harvard Library edition follows the text ofthe expanded edition printed by the shop of Benjamin Towne forW. and T. Bradford of Philadelphia.

ALAN TAYLOR is Professor of History at the University ofCalifornia at Davis. He is the author of several books,including Wi l l iam Cooper ’s Town: Power and Persuas ionon the Front i e r o f the Ear l y Amer i can Repub l i c , winnerof the Pulitzer Prize for History and the Bancroft Prize forAmerican History.

BELKNAP PRESS | THE JOHN HARVARD LIBRARY |OCTOBER | 5 1⁄2 X 8 1⁄4 | 92 PP. |PAPER: ISBN 978-0-674-05116-4 | $7.95 (£5.95 UK) |HISTORY / POLITICS

S INCE 1959 THE JOHN HARVARD L I BRARY HAS BE EN

IN S TRUMENTAL I N PUB L I SH ING E S S ENT I A L AMER I CAN

WR I T I NGS IN AUTHOR I TAT I V E ED I T I ONS .

Page 109: Harvard University Press Fall 2010 Catalog

w w w . h u p . h a r v a r d . e d u � h a r v a r d u n i v e r s i t y p r e s s 1 0 7

THE FEDERALISTALEXANDER HAMILTON,JAMES MADISON, AND JOHN JAYINTRODUCTION BYCASS R. SUNSTEINPAPER $14.95 / £11.95ISBN 978-0-674-03573-7

INCIDENTS IN THE LIFE OF A SLAVE GIRL:WRITTEN BY HERSELFWITH "A TRUE TALE OF SLAVERY"BY JOHN S. JACOBHARRIET A. JACOBSEDITED BY JEAN FAGAN YELLINPAPER $16.95 / £12.95ISBN 978-0-674-03583-6

HOWTHE OTHER HALF LIVES:STUDIES AMONG THE TENEMENTSOF NEWYORKJACOB A. RIISEDITED BY SAM B.WARNER, JR.INTRODUCTION BY ALAN TRACHTENBERGPAPER $12.95 / £9.95ISBN 978-0-674-04932-1

NARRATIVE OF THE LIFE OF FREDERICKDOUGLASS: AN AMERICAN SLAVE,WRITTEN BY HIMSELFINTRODUCTION BYROBERT B. STEPTOPAPER $7.95 / £5.95ISBN 978-0-674-03401-3

THE COMMON LAWOLIVERWENDELL HOLMES, JR.INTRODUCTION BYG. EDWARDWHITEPAPER $12.95 / £9.95ISBN 978-0-674-03402-0

THEWORKS OF ANNE BRADSTREETEDITED BY JEANNINE HENSLEYFOREWORD BY ADRIENNE RICHPAPER $16.95 / £12.95ISBN 978-0-674-05027-3

THE SCARLET LETTERNATHANIEL HAWTHORNEINTRODUCTION BYMICHAEL J. COLACURCIOPAPER $9.95 / £7.95ISBN 978-0-674-03574-4

THE HOUSE OF THE SEVEN GABLESNATHANIEL HAWTHORNEINTRODUCTION BYDENIS DONOGHUEPAPER $9.95 / £7.95ISBN 978-0-674-03575-1

THE BLITHEDALE ROMANCENATHANIEL HAWTHORNEINTRODUCTION BYROBERT S. LEVINEPAPER $9.95 / £7.95ISBN 978-0-674-05021-1

THE RED BADGE OF COURAGESTEPHEN CRANEEDITED BY PAUL SORRENTINOPAPER $7.95 / £5.95ISBN 978-0-674-03399-3

UNCLE TOM’S CABINHARRIET BEECHER STOWEINTRODUCTION BYDAVID BROMWICHPAPER $8.95 / £6.95ISBN 978-0-674-03407-5

JIM CROW, AMERICAN:SELECTED SONGS AND PLAYST. D. RICEEDITED BYW. T. LHAMON, JR.PAPER $14.95 / £11.95ISBN 978-0-674-03593-5

Page 110: Harvard University Press Fall 2010 Catalog

w w w . h u p . h a r v a r d . e d u � h a r v a r d u n i v e r s i t y p r e s s1 0 8

Children of theRevolutionThe French, 1799–1914

Robert Gildea

For those who lived in the wake ofthe French Revolution, from thestorming of the Bastille to Napoleon’sfinal defeat, its aftermath left a pro-found wound that no subsequentking, emperor, or president couldheal. Children of the Revolution fol-lows the ensuing generations whorepeatedly tried and failed to comeup with a stable regime.

“ONE OF THE CONSIDERABLE

STRENGTHS OF CHILDREN OF THE REVOLUTION IS

GILDEA’S EYE FOR AN INDIVIDUAL EXAMPLE,ANECDOTE OR APHORISM, COMBINED WITH HIS COMPREHENSIVE

KNOWLEDGE OF THE LITERATURE OF NINETEENTH-CENTURY FRANCE.”

—RUTH SCURR, THE NATION

“WITH PENETRATION AND STYLE, [GILDEA] PAINTS A COMPLEX

PORTRAIT OF A SOCIETY GEOGRAPHICALLY AND TEMPERAMENTALLY

DIVIDED, CONSTANTLY AT WAR WITH ITSELF, YET MANAGING TO FORGE

A COHESIVE NATIONAL IDENTITY AT HOME AND ABROAD.”

—THE ATLANTIC

“ABOVE ALL, [GILDEA] SUCCEEDS IN ONE CENTRAL TASK: SHOWING

JUST HOW SURPRISINGLY LIVABLE AND CREATIVE FRANCE WAS DURING

THIS GOLDEN CENTURY-LONG INTERVAL BETWEEN TWO MOMENTS OF

HORROR.”

—DAVID A. BELL, NEW REPUBLIC

ROBERT G I LDEA is Professor of Modern History at theUniversity of Oxford, and the author of Mar ianne inCha ins , winner of the Wolfson Prize for history.

CLOTH: SEPTEMBER 2008 / ISBN 978-0-674-03209-5 |OCTOBER | 6 1⁄8 X 9 1⁄4 | 7 MAPS, 43 HALFTONES | 576 PP. |PAPER: ISBN 978-0-674-05724-1 | $22.95 * / USA |HISTORY

Democracy’s PrisonerEugene V. Debs, the Great War, and the Right to Dissent

Ernest Freeberg

WINNER OF THE

DAVID J. LANGUM, SR. PRIZE

IN AMERICAN LEGAL HISTORY

FINALIST, LOS ANGELES TIMES

BOOK PRIZE

In 1920, socialist leader Eugene V.Debs ran for president while serv-ing a ten-year jail term for speakingagainst America’s role in World WarI. Though many called Debs a trai-tor, others praised him as a prisonerof conscience, a martyr to the causeof free speech. Ernest Freeberg

shows that the campaign to send Debs from an Atlanta jailhouseto the White House was part of a wider national debate over theright to free speech in wartime.

“IF HISTORY IS WHAT THE PRESENT WANTS TO KNOW ABOUT THE PAST,DEMOCRACY’S PRISONER IS TEEMING WITH LESSONS. BUT ABOVE ALL,IT’S THE STORY OF ONE EXTRAORDINARY MAN’S SHOWDOWN WITH THE

ESTABLISHMENT—AND HOW THAT CONFRONTATION TURNED INTO A

COMPLEX POLITICAL STRUGGLE WHOSE OUTCOME WAS UP FOR GRABS.”

—PETER RICHARDSON, LOS ANGELES TIMES BOOK REVIEW

“THIS FASCINATING BOOK ABOUT [DEBS’S] CLIMACTIC LAST YEARS

MAKES CLEAR THAT HE REALLY MATTERED. IN BOTH POLITICAL AND

LEGAL WAYS HE PLAYED A SIGNIFICANT PART IN REDUCING

INTOLERANCE OF DISSENT IN THIS COUNTRY, AND BRINGING TO LIFE

THE FIRST AMENDMENT’S GUARANTEE OF FREE SPEECH.”

—ANTHONY LEWIS, NEW YORK REVIEW OF BOOKS

ERNEST FREEBERG is Associate Professor of History atthe University of Tennessee.

CLOTH: MAY 2008 / ISBN 978-0-674-02792-3 |OCTOBER | 6 1⁄8 X 9 1⁄4 | 17 HALFTONES | 392 PP. |PAPER: ISBN 978-0-674-05720-3 | $18.95 * (£14.95 UK) |HISTORY

Page 111: Harvard University Press Fall 2010 Catalog

The Quest forDemocracy in IranA Century of Struggle against Authoritarian Rule

Fakhreddin Azimi

WINNER OF THE 2010 MOSSADEGH PRIZE

The Constitutional Revolution of 1906 launched Iran as a pio-neer in a broad-based movement to establish democratic rule inthe non-Western world. In a book that provides essential contextfor understanding modern Iran, Fakhreddin Azimi traces acentury of struggle for the establishment of representativegovernment.

“FOR AZIMI, ALL IRANIAN HISTORY AFTER 1905 IS AN ATTEMPT TO

FULFILL, PARTIALLY ACCOMMODATE OR CIRCUMVENT THE IDEALS OF A

CONSTITUTIONAL MOVEMENT THAT PLACED POPULAR REPRESENTATION

AT THE FORE OF ITS PRIORITIES. HE TRACES HOW AT VARIOUS

MOMENTS PUBLIC ALIENATION AND RESENTMENT HAVE BEEN

ARTICULATED OR EXPRESSED AND FINALLY, HOW ‘A CULTURE OF

CONFRONTATION’ EMERGED. HIS BOOK GOES A LONG WAY TOWARD

RECUPERATING A HISTORY OF IRANIAN DEMOCRACY THAT HAS BEEN

EXPUNGED BY ORIENTALISTS WHO WONDER ALOUD IF THERE IS

SOMETHING ABOUT MUSLIM LANDS THAT MAKES THEM INHOSPITABLE

TO DEMOCRACY OR, ALTERNATIVELY, THOSE WHO HAVE DISMISSED

PERIODS OF HECTIC PARLIAMENTARY ACTIVITY AS MERE CHAOS.”

—NEGAR AZIMI, THE NATION

“THE QUEST FOR DEMOCRACY IN IRAN IS PARTICULARLY STRONG ON

RETRIEVING THE IMPORTANCE OF THE CONSTITUTIONAL REVOLUTION

AND THREADING IT THROUGH TO THE ISLAMIC REPUBLIC’S CURRENT

DIALECTIC BETWEEN REPUBLICANISM AND THEOCRACY.”

—DAVID GARDNER, FINANCIAL TIMES

FAKHREDD IN AZ IM I is Professor of History at theUniversity of Connecticut.

CLOTH: APRIL 2008 / ISBN 978-0-674-02778-7 |SEPTEMBER | 6 1⁄8 X 9 1⁄4 | 20 HALFTONES | 512 PP. |PAPER: ISBN 978-0-674-05706-7 | $19.95 * (£14.95 UK) |HISTORY

The Early ChineseEmpiresQin and Han

Mark Edward LewisTHE HISTORY OF IMPERIAL CHINA SERIESTIMOTHY BROOK, GENERAL EDITOR

In this first book in a six-volume series, weare present at the creation of an ancientimperial order whose major features wouldendure for two millennia. The Early Chi-nese Empires illuminates many formativeevents in China’s long history of imperial-ism—events whose residual influence canstill be discerned today.

“THIS SIX-VOLUME SERIES [COVERS] THE RISE,DEVELOPMENT, AND DECLINE OF DYNASTIC

CHINA FROM THE SECOND CENTURY B.C.E.THROUGH THE EARLY 20TH CENTURY…THIS

OPENING VOLUME BY LEWIS FORETELLS THAT

THE SERIES WILL BECOME THE NEW GOLD

STANDARD.”

—CHARLES W. HAYFORD,LIBRARY JOURNAL (STARRED REVIEW)

“MARK LEWIS’S MIND-OPENING AND READABLE

BOOK REMINDS US OF THE ENDURING BUT

CHANGING REALITIES OF CHINA.”

—JONATHAN MIRSKY,TIMES LITERARY SUPPLEMENT

MARK EDWARD LEWIS is Kwoh-Ting Li Professor inChinese Culture, Stanford University. He is the author ofCh ina between Empi res : The Nor thern and SouthernDynas t i e s and Ch ina ’s Cosmopo l i tan Empi re : The TangDynas t y (both from Harvard).

BELKNAP PRESS | HISTORY OF IMPERIAL CHINA 1 |CLOTH: APRIL 2007 / ISBN 978-0-674-02477-9 |OCTOBER | 6 1⁄8 X 9 1⁄4 | 23 HALFTONES, 16 MAPS | 336 PP. |PAPER: ISBN 978-0-674-05734-0 | $18.95 * (£14.95 UK) |HISTORY

w w w . h u p . h a r v a r d . e d u � h a r v a r d u n i v e r s i t y p r e s s 1 0 9

Page 112: Harvard University Press Fall 2010 Catalog

w w w . h u p . h a r v a r d . e d u � h a r v a r d u n i v e r s i t y p r e s s1 1 0

FreshA Perishable History

Susanne Freidberg

That rosy tomato perched on your plate inDecember is at the end of a great journey—not just over land and sea, but across a vastand varied cultural history. This is the terri-tory charted in Fresh.

“A DIETARY-CUM-SOCIAL HISTORY OF THE

MARK KURLANSKY/MICHAEL POLLAN SORT,THIS SMART, SWEEPING, AND TIMELY VOLUME—APPEARING AT A MOMENT WHEN BUYING

LOCALLY AND EATING ORGANICALLY ARE

FASHIONABLY RESPONSIBLE QUESTS—CONSIDERS THE CONUNDRUMS OF INDUSTRIAL

FRESHNESS…COLD STORAGE, FREIDBERGARGUES, HAS ALTERED TASTES, DAMAGED THE

ENVIRONMENT, HURT THE CONSUMER, ANDHELPED FACILITATE THE LESS-THAN-SALUTARYSHIFT FROM LOCALISM TO GLOBALISM…FOOD,TRULY, FOR THOUGHT.”

—THE ATLANTIC

“A FASCINATING PICTURE OF OUR CHANGING

VIEWS OF PERISHABLE FOOD…IT IS THE

HISTORICAL DETAIL OF FRESH THAT THROWS SO

MUCH LIGHT ON WHY WE NOW EAT THE WAY WE

DO…FREIDBERG WRITES ELEGANTLY AND GOES

BEYOND THE TECHNICAL TO DRAW OUT THIS

PARADOX AT THE HEART OF TODAY’S CULTURE

OF CONSUMPTION.”

—FELICITY LAWRENCE, THE GUARDIAN

SUSANNE FRE IDBERG is Associate Professor ofGeography at Dartmouth College.

BELKNAP PRESS | CLOTH: APRIL 2009 / ISBN 978-0-674-03291-0 |OCTOBER | 5 1⁄2 X 8 1⁄4 | 28 HALFTONES | 416 PP. |PAPER: ISBN 978-0-674-05722-7 | $17.95 * (£13.95 UK) |CURRENT AFFAIRS

AddictionA Disorder of Choice

Gene M. Heyman

In a book sure to inspire controversy, Gene Heyman argues thatconventional wisdom about addiction—that it is a disease, acompulsion beyond conscious control—is wrong. Drawing onpsychiatric epidemiology, addicts’ autobiographies, treatmentstudies, and advances in behavioral economics, Heyman makesa powerful case that addiction is voluntary.

“WE HAVE A JUSTICE SYSTEM THAT TREATS DRUG USE AS A

MALEVOLENT ACT OF WILL (TO BE PUNISHED) AND A MEDICAL

PROFESSION THAT TREATS IT AS AN UNFORTUNATE DISEASE (TO BE

CURED). WHO IS RIGHT?…[HEYMAN] ARGUES THAT IT IS NOT HIS

FELLOW MEDICAL PROFESSIONALS…THIS IS A RICH BOOK THAT

REVERBERATES FAR BEYOND THE FIELD OF ADDICTION STUDIES.ATTENTIVE READERS WILL FIND IN IT LESSONS ABOUT DEBT-FINANCEDCONSUMERISM, ENVIRONMENTAL SPOLIATION AND THE WHOLE, VASTRANGE OF SELF-DESTRUCTIVE BEHAVIOR THAT WE ENGAGE IN OUT OF

SELF-INTEREST.”

—CHRISTOPHER CALDWELL, FINANCIAL TIMES

“DRAWING FROM BEHAVIORAL ECONOMICS, HEYMAN SHOWS HOW

THE FAILURE TO SACRIFICE SHORT-TERM GAINS (GETTING HIGH) FOR

LONG-TERM GAINS (SOBRIETY-AIDED PRODUCTIVITY) IS ENDEMIC TO A

CONSUMER CULTURE, AND HOW IMPORTANT A PERSON’S SOCIAL

CONTEXT IS TO REINING IN THE PENCHANT FOR PLEASURE…HIS

APPROACH IS REFRESHING, AVOIDING FALSE DILEMMAS ABOUT FREE

WILL AND BIOLOGICAL DETERMINISM.”

—GARY GREENBERG, NEW SCIENTIST

GENE M. HEYMAN is a research psychologist and aLecturer in Psychology at Harvard Medical School.

CLOTH: JUNE 2009 / ISBN 978-0-674-03298-9 |OCTOBER | 6 1⁄8 X 9 1⁄4 | 20 LINE ILLUS. | 216 PP. |PAPER: ISBN 978-0-674-05727-2 | $17.95 * (£13.95 UK) |PSYCHOLOGY / MEDICINE

Page 113: Harvard University Press Fall 2010 Catalog

How Professors ThinkInside the Curious World of Academic Judgment

Michèle Lamont

In the academic evaluation system known as “peer review,”highly respected professors pass judgment, usually confidentially,on the work of others. But only those present in the deliberativechambers know exactly what is said. Michèle Lamont observeddeliberations for fellowships and research grants, and inter-viewed panel members at length. In How Professors Think, shereveals what she discovered about this secretive, powerful, pecu-liar world.

“THIS FAIR-MINDED AND READER-FRIENDLY BOOK MIGHT JUST HELP

PRODUCE THE TRUST, RESPECT, AND TOLERANCE NECESSARY FOR

ACADEMIC COMMUNITY. BY CLOSELY EXAMINING SCHOLARLY

EVALUATION AND IDENTIFYING DISTINCTIVE DISCIPLINARY DEFINITIONS

OF QUALITY AMONG THE HUMANITIES AND SOCIAL SCIENCES, MICHÈLE

LAMONT SHOWS THAT ACADEMIC CULTURE, FAR FROM BEING A

HIERARCHY DECLINING FROM SUPPOSEDLY MORE ‘RIGOROUS’ ANDDEMANDING DISCIPLINES TO THOSE LESS SO, IS CONSTITUTED OF

MANY DIFFERENT EXCELLENCIES.”

—THOMAS BENDER, AUTHOR OF INTELLECT AND PUBLIC LIFE

“ALL THE DEANS AND PROVOSTS WHO FRET ABOUT THEIR RANKINGS

AND GRANT MONEY SHOULD READ THIS FIRST-HAND ACCOUNT OF HOW

SCHOLARS AND SOCIAL SCIENTISTS ARE EVALUATED IN PRACTICE.”

—BRUNO LATOUR, AUTHOR OF POLITICS OF NATURE: HOW TO

BRING THE SCIENCES INTO DEMOCRACY

MICHÈLE LAMONT is Robert I. Goldman Professor ofEuropean Studies and Professor of Sociology and African andAfrican American Studies, and Senior Adviser on FacultyDevelopment and Diversity, Faculty of Arts and Sciences atHarvard University.

CLOTH: MARCH 2009 / ISBN 978-0-674-03266-8 |OCTOBER | 5 1⁄2 X 8 1⁄4 | 1 LINE ILLUS., 9 TABLES | 336 PP. |PAPER: ISBN 978-0-674-05733-3 | $17.95 * (£13.95 UK) |EDUCATION / SOCIOLOGY

RethinkingJuvenile JusticeElizabeth S. Scott andLaurence Steinberg

SOCIAL POLICY BEST AUTHORED BOOK AWARD,SOCIETY FOR RESEARCH ON ADOLESCENTS

What should we do with teenagers who com-mit crimes? “Adult time for adult crime” hasbeen the justice system’s mantra for the lasttwenty years. But locking up so many youngpeople puts a strain on state budgets—andironically, the evidence suggests it ultimatelyincreases crime.

“WHAT MAKES [THIS] BOOK SO VALUABLE IS

THAT IT CAN BE RELIED UPON BY JUDGES,LEGISLATURES, LAWYERS, AND POLICYMAKERS TO

ENHANCE THE SOPHISTICATION WITH WHICH THEY

CONSIDER THE VERY ISSUES THAT THEY ARE

CURRENTLY BEING CALLED ON TO DECIDE…LAWMAKERS ALREADY LOOK TO SCOTT AND

STEINBERG’S EARLIER WORK WHEN THEY ADDRESS

HOW THE LAW SHOULD RESPOND TO JUVENILE

CRIME, AND THIS BOOK SHOULD ONLY ENHANCE

THE SOPHISTICATION OF THOSE LAWMAKING

EFFORTS.”

—EMILY BUSS,UNIVERSIT Y OF CHICAGO LAW REVIEW

“THIS IS A BOOK THAT EVERYONE SHOULD READ.”

—LUCY S. MCGOUGH, LAW AND POLITICS BOOK REVIEW

EL IZABETH S . SCOTT is Harold R. Medina Professor ofLaw at Columbia University. LAURENCE STE INBERG isDistinguished University Professor of Psychology at TempleUniversity.

CLOTH: SEPTEMBER 2008 / ISBN 978-0-674-03086-2 |SEPTEMBER | 5 1⁄2 X 8 1⁄4 | 384 PP. |PAPER: ISBN 978-0-674-05746-3 | $18.95 * (£14.95 UK) |LAW / PSYCHOLOGY

w w w . h u p . h a r v a r d . e d u � h a r v a r d u n i v e r s i t y p r e s s 1 1 1

Page 114: Harvard University Press Fall 2010 Catalog

w w w . h u p . h a r v a r d . e d u � h a r v a r d u n i v e r s i t y p r e s s1 1 2

Mind in LifeBiology, Phenomenology, and the Sciences of Mind

Evan Thompson

HONORABLE MENTION, CANADIAN

PHILOSOPHICAL ASSOCIATION AWARDS

How is life related to the mind? The ques-tion has long confounded philosophers andscientists, and it is this so-called explanatorygap between biological life and conscious-ness that Evan Thompson explores in Mindin Life.

“THIS IS A HIGHLY IMPRESSIVE WORK, OFCONSIDERABLE SCOPE, IMPORTANCE, ANDORIGINALITY…FOR PHILOSOPHERS OF BIOLOGY,AS FOR COGNITIVE SCIENTISTS AND

PHILOSOPHERS OF MIND, MIND IN LIFE IS SURE

TO BECOME ESSENTIAL READING.”

—JOHN C. WALLER, ISIS

“ONE OF THE RICHEST CONTRIBUTIONS TO THE

STUDY OF ‘MIND IN LIFE’ IN RECENT YEARS. ITDESERVES TO BECOME A MAJOR WORK OF

REFERENCE AND INSPIRATION FOR RESEARCH IN

THE IMMEDIATE FUTURE AND, INDEED, FORMANY YEARS TO COME.”

—KEITH ANSELL-PEARSON,PHENOMENOLOGY AND THE COGNITIVE

SCIENCES

“THOMPSON HAS WRITTEN A BOOK THAT FOR

PHILOSOPHERS MAY GIVE A NEW INCENTIVE TO

RETHINK AND RECONCEPTUALIZE OUR PLACE IN

THE WORLD THAT SURPASSES DUALISTIC THINKING.”

—TAEDE A. SMEDES, METAPSYCHOLOGY

EVAN THOMPSON is Professor of Philosophy at theUniversity of Toronto.

BELKNAP PRESS | CLOTH: APRIL 2007 / ISBN 978-0-674-02511-0 |SEPTEMBER | 6 1⁄8 X 9 1⁄4 | 8 COLOR ILLUS., 12 LINE ILLUS., 2 TABLES |568 PP. | PAPER: ISBN 978-0-674-05751-7 | $24.95 * (£18.95 UK) |PHILOSOPHY

The Tinkerer’sAccompliceHow Design Emerges from Life Itself

J. Scott Turner

Most people, when they contemplate the living world, concludethat it is a designed place. So it is jarring when biologists comealong and say this is all wrong. What most people see as design,they say—purposeful, directed, even intelligent—is only an illu-sion, something cooked up in a mind that is eager to see purposewhere none exists. In these days of increasingly assertive chal-lenges to Darwinism, the question becomes acute: is our per-ception of design simply a mental figment, or is there somethingdeeper at work?

“IT IS FUN TO READ TURNER’S PROSE, TO LEARN FROM HIM ABOUT

SELF-ORGANIZING SYSTEMS AND THEIR ENORMOUS SIGNIFICANCE IN

EVOLUTION, AND TO THINK THROUGH HIS ARGUMENTS, WITH ALL

THEIR ACCOMPANYING INTELLECTUAL CHALLENGES. THIS IMPORTANT

BOOK IS FOR THOSE WHO SEARCH FOR AN UNDERSTANDING OF THE

VARIOUS FORMS THAT LIFE CAN TAKE AND OF HOW LIFE WORKS.”

—CLAUS WEDEKIND, NATURE

“ASSURING READERS THAT HE IS NEITHER CHALLENGING DARWINISM

NOR SLIPPING A DISGUISE OVER SO-CALLED INTELLIGENT DESIGN,TURNER HOLDS THAT BLINDLY OPERATING NATURAL SELECTION DOES

NOT PRECLUDE WHAT HE INTERPRETS AS INTENTIONAL BIOLOGICAL

ACTIVITY…TURNER’S THESIS SHOULD GAIN TRACTION WITH THOSE

THINKING AND DEBATING ISSUES IN EVOLUTION.”

—GILBERT TAYLOR, BOOKLIST

J . SCOTT TURNER is Associate Professor at SUNYCollege of Environmental Science and Forestry, Syracuse.

CLOTH: JANUARY 2007 / ISBN 978-0-674-02353-6 |SEPTEMBER | 6 1⁄8 X 9 1⁄4 | 8 HALFTONES, 31 LINES | 304 PP. |PAPER: ISBN 978-0-674-05753-1 | $17.95X (£13.95 UK) |SCIENCE

Page 115: Harvard University Press Fall 2010 Catalog

China MarchesWestThe Qing Conquest of Central Eurasia

Peter C. Perdue

WINNER OF THE ASSOCIATION FOR ASIAN STUDIES CHINA AND

INNER ASIA COUNCIL LEVENSON PRIZE FOR BOOKS IN CHINESE

STUDIES, PRE-1900 CATEGORY

From about 1600 to 1800, the Qing empire of China expandedto unprecedented size. Through astute diplomacy, economicinvestment, and a series of ambitious military campaigns intothe heart of Central Eurasia, the Manchu rulers defeated theZunghar Mongols and brought all of modern Xinjiang and Mon-golia under their control, while gaining dominant influence inTibet. The China we know is a product of these vast conquests.

“IN THIS MASSIVE AND BEAUTIFULLY ILLUSTRATED VOLUME, PETER C.PERDUE HAS PRODUCED THE FIRST BROAD SURVEY IN A WESTERN

LANGUAGE IN VIRTUALLY A CENTURY OF THE QING DYNASTY’SPROTRACTED WARS AGAINST THE ZUNGHARS…AS AN ACCOUNT OF

HOW CHINA DEFEATED THE ZUNGHARS AND HOW THE QING DYNASTY

SECURED ITS CONQUEST OF THE EASTERN PART OF CENTRAL EURASIA,THIS GROUND-BREAKING BOOK WILL BE READ BY BOTH SPECIALISTS

EVALUATING THE ARGUMENTS AND BY STUDENTS NEEDING AN

INTRODUCTION TO THIS IMPORTANT TOPIC.”

—CHRISTOPHER P. ATWOOD,AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW

“PERDUE SUCCEEDS IN GIVING NEW LIFE TO MATTERS THAT HAVE

SUCCUMBED TO STALE CONVENTIONAL THINKING.”

—LUCIAN PYE, FOREIGN AFFAIRS

PETER C . PERDUE is Professor of History at YaleUniversity.

BELKNAP PRESS | CLOTH: APRIL 2005 / ISBN 978-0-674-01684-2 |SEPTEMBER | 6 1⁄2 X 9 1⁄2 | 32 BLACK &WHITE ILLUS., 21 HALFTONES,10 MAPS, 3 LINE ILLUS., 16 TABLES | 752 PP. |PAPER: ISBN 978-0-674-05743-2 | $19.95X (£14.95 UK) |HISTORY

Moral DimensionsPermissibility, Meaning, Blame

T. M. Scanlon

In a clear and elegant style, T. M. Scanlonreframes current philosophical debates as heexplores the moral permissibility of anaction.

“THE FIRST HALF OF THE BOOK, ONPERMISSIBILITY AND MEANING, AMOUNTS TO

MASTERFUL AND INSIGHTFUL PHILOSOPHICAL

HOUSEKEEPING. THE SECOND HALF IS

REVOLUTIONARY IN THE WAYS IT TELLS US TO

THINK ABOUT BLAME.”

—ALLAN GIBBARD,LONDON REVIEW OF BOOKS

“SCANLON EXAMINES THE PERMISSIBILITY OF

ACTIONS AND THE EVALUATIONS OF ACTORS,WITH A NEW ACCOUNT OF BOTH THE INITIAL—AND AS HE SEES IT, ILLUSORY—ATTRACTION OF

THE ‘DOCTRINE OF DOUBLE EFFECT.’ HE ARGUES

THAT THE ILLUSION STEMS FROM CONFUSION

BETWEEN TWO TYPES OF MORAL JUDGMENT,WHICH APPLY PRINCIPLES IN WHAT SCANLONTERMS EITHER ‘CRITICAL’ OR ‘DELIBERATIVE’USES. SCANLON USES THIS DIFFERENCE TO MAKE

AN IMPORTANT NEW DISTINCTION BETWEEN THE

PERMISSIBILITY OF ACTIONS AND THEIR

MEANING, AND TO DEVELOP ACCOUNTS OF

BLAME (LINKED TO THE MEANING OF AN ACTION)AND MORAL RESPONSIBILITY THAT BEAR CLOSE ATTENTION.”

—J. H. BARKER, CHOICE

T. M . SCANLON is Alford Professor of Natural Religion,Moral Philosophy, and Civil Polity at Harvard University.

BELKNAP PRESS | CLOTH: SEPTEMBER 2008 / ISBN 978-0-674-03178-4 |SEPTEMBER | 5 1⁄2 X 8 1⁄4 | 264 PP. |PAPER: ISBN 978-0-674-05745-6 | $17.95X (£13.95 UK) |PHILOSOPHY

w w w . h u p . h a r v a r d . e d u � h a r v a r d u n i v e r s i t y p r e s s 1 1 3

Page 116: Harvard University Press Fall 2010 Catalog

w w w . h u p . h a r v a r d . e d u � h a r v a r d u n i v e r s i t y p r e s s1 1 4

America’s Geisha AllyReimagining the Japanese Enemy

Naoko Shibusawa

As the Cold War heated up the U.S. govern-ment decided to make Japan its bulwarkagainst communism in Asia. But how wasthe American public made to accept analliance with Japan so soon after the “Japs”had been demonized as subhuman, buck-toothed apes with Coke-bottle glasses? Inthis revelatory work, Naoko Shibusawacharts the remarkable reversal from hatedenemy to valuable ally that occurred in thetwo decades after the war.

“AN ENTERTAINING AND ERUDITE ACCOUNT (ARARE COMBINATION!) OF THE EVOLUTION OF

AMERICAN VIEWS OF JAPAN IN THE YEARS

FOLLOWING JAPAN’S SURRENDER IN AUGUST

1945…SHIBUSAWA’S SPARKLING PROSE

MAKES AMERICA’S GEISHA ALLY A FUN AND

ENLIGHTENING READ.”

—KENNETH J. RUOFF, ASAHI SHIMBUN

“INGENIOUSLY COMBINES SOCIAL HISTORY AND

DOMESTIC HISTORY BY DISCUSSING HOW

AMERICAN CITIZENS CONTRIBUTED TO THE

PROCESS OF INCORPORATING JAPAN INTO THE

US-LED LIBERAL CAPITALIST FRAMEWORK IN

THE YEARS IMMEDIATELY AFTER THE SECONDWORLD WAR.”

—YUJIN YAGUCHI,JOURNAL OF AMERICAN STUDIES

NAOKO SH IBUSAWA is Assistant Professor of Historyat Brown University.

CLOTH: DECEMBER 2006 / ISBN 978-0-674-02348-2 |SEPTEMBER | 5 1⁄2 X 8 1⁄4 | 11 HALFTONES | 408 PP. |PAPER: ISBN 978-0-674-05747-0 | $19.95X (£14.95 UK) |HISTORY

The Reaper’s GardenDeath and Power in the World of Atlantic Slavery

Vincent Brown

CO-WINNER OF THE MERLE CURTI AWARD,ORGANIZATION OF AMERICAN HISTORIANS

WINNER OF THE JAMES A. RAWLEY PRIZE,ORGANIZATION OF AMERICAN HISTORIANS

WINNER OF THE LOUIS GOTTSCHALK PRIZE,AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR EIGHTEENTH-CENTURY STUDIES

What did people make of death in the world of Atlantic slavery?In The Reaper’s Garden, Vincent Brown asks this question aboutJamaica, the staggeringly profitable hub of the British Empire inAmerica—and a human catastrophe. Popularly known as thegrave of the Europeans, it was just as deadly for Africans andtheir descendants. Yet among the survivors, the dead remainedboth a vital presence and a social force.

“ENGROSSING…BROWN’S MAJOR CONCERN IS THE CULTURAL

SIGNIFICANCE OF DEATH IN A LAND MARKED BY HIGH MORTALITY.HERE, HIS ACCOUNT IS COMPELLING AND HIGHLY ORIGINAL. HE IS

ESPECIALLY INTERESTED IN HOW BOTH WHITES AND BLACKS USED

DEATH TO CONTROL THE STRANGE ENVIRONMENT THEY FOUND

THEMSELVES IN.”

—TREVOR BURNARD, TIMES HIGHER EDUCATION SUPPLEMENT

“BROWN’S THE REAPER'S GARDEN IS A PENETRATING AND THOUGHT-PROVOKING BOOK THAT IS A VALUABLE CONTRIBUTION TO THE STUDY

OF EARLY AMERICA AND THE BRITISH ATLANTIC WORLD. AS

MORTALITY WAS A CENTRAL FACT THROUGHOUT COLONIAL AMERICAN

LIFE, FOR BLACKS AND WHITES, HISTORIANS WILL FIND THAT AFTER

READING BROWN’S BOOK, THEY MAY NEVER LOOK AT THE WORLD OF

COLONIAL BRITISH AMERICA THE SAME WAY AGAIN.”

—W. BRYAN ROMMEL-RUIZ, COMMON-PLACE

V INCENT BROWN is Professor of History and of Africanand African American Studies at Harvard University.

CLOTH: FEBRUARY 2008 / ISBN 978-0-674-02422-9 |SEPTEMBER | 6 1⁄8 X 9 1⁄4 | 18 HALFTONES, 6 MAPS/GRAPHS | 368 PP. |PAPER: ISBN 978-0-674-05712-8 | $19.95X (£14.95 UK) |HISTORY

Page 117: Harvard University Press Fall 2010 Catalog

Destined for EqualityThe Inevitable Rise of Women’s Status

Robert Max Jackson

HONORABLE MENTION, ASSOCIATION OF AMERICAN PUBLISHERS

PROFESSIONAL/SCHOLARLY PUBLISHING ANNUAL AWARD

This volume, the first integrated analysis of gender inequality’smodern decline, tells the story of that progressive movementtoward equality over the past two centuries in America, show-ing that women’s status has risen consistently and continuously.As economic power has migrated into large-scale organizationsinherently indifferent to gender distinctions, the patriarchalmodel has lost its social and cultural sway, and women’s con-tinual efforts to rise in the world became more successful.

“NO ONE INTERESTED IN STATUS-BASED INEQUALITIES (FOR EXAMPLE,GENDER, RACE, ETHNICITY) CAN AFFORD TO IGNORE THIS BOOK.”

—JANET SALTZMAN CHAFETZ, AMERICAN ACADEMY OF POLITICAL

AND SOCIAL SCIENCE ANNALS

“THIS AMBITIOUS BOOK DESERVES WIDE READERSHIP. ONE DOES NOT

HAVE TO AGREE WITH JACKSON THAT WOMEN WERE, AS THE TITLE

SUGGESTS, ‘DESTINED FOR EQUALITY’ TO APPRECIATE THE

FORCE OF HIS ARGUMENT AND THE CRISP AND

CLEAR MANNER IN WHICH HE PRESENTS IT.”

—DENNIS A. DESLIPPE,JOURNAL OF AMERICAN HISTORY

ROBERT MAX JACKSON isAssociate Professor of Sociology atNew York University.

CLOTH: 1998 / ISBN 978-0-674-05511-7 |SEPTEMBER | 6 1⁄8 X 9 1⁄4 |11 LINE ILLUS., 1 TABLE | 336 PP. |PAPER: ISBN 978-0-674-05728-9 |$22.95X (£16.95 UK) |SOCIOLOGY

Minerva’s OwlThe Tradition of Western Political Thought

Jeffrey Abramson

This book serves as a lively and accessi-ble guide for readers discovering the tra-dition of political thought that dates backto Socrates and Plato. Jeffrey Abramsonargues politics with the classic writersand draws the reader into a spirited con-versation with contemporary examplesthat illustrate the enduring nature ofpolitical dilemmas. As the discussionsdeepen, the voices of Abramson’s ownteachers and of the students he hastaught enter into the mix; and the bookbecomes a tribute not just to the greatphilosophers but also to the special bondbetween teacher and student.

“ABRAMSON BESTOWS UPON READERS THE BENEFIT OF HIS DECADES

OF TEACHING POLITICAL PHILOSOPHY…THIS BOOK CONSISTS OF

STRAIGHTFORWARD AND LUCID EXPLORATIONS OF THE CANONICAL

THINKERS AND THEIR WORKS.”

—STEVEN CHABOT, LIBRARY JOURNAL

“[ABRAMSON] GIVES US A WONDERFULLY ACCESSIBLE SURVEY OF

THE ENTIRE FIELD OF WESTERN POLITICAL PHILOSOPHY. HIS BOOK

IS NOT ONLY A FINE INTRODUCTION FOR BEGINNERS, BUT ALSO

AN ERUDITE, NONPARTISAN CONSIDERATION FOR THOSE WHO

MAY BE MORE CONVERSANT WITH THE LITERATURE. THERE IS

SOMETHING TO THINK ABOUT ON EVERY PAGE.”

—ROGER GATHMAN, AUSTIN AMERICAN-STATESMAN

J EFFREY ABRAMSON is Professor of Governmentand Law and Fellow of the Frank C. Erwin, Jr. CentennialChair in Government, University of Texas at Austin.

CLOTH: APRIL 2009 / ISBN 978-0-674-03265-1 |SEPTEMBER | 6 1⁄8 X 9 1⁄4 | 400 PP. |PAPER: ISBN 978-0-674-05702-9 | $18.95X (£14.95 UK) |PHILOSOPHY / POLITICS

1 1 5w w w . h u p . h a r v a r d . e d u � h a r v a r d u n i v e r s i t y p r e s s

Page 118: Harvard University Press Fall 2010 Catalog

1 1 6

The Selma ofthe NorthCivil Rights Insurgency in Milwaukee

Patrick D. Jones

A CHOICE OUTSTANDING ACADEMIC TITLE

CO-WINNER OF THE GAMBRINUS PRIZE,MILWAUKEE COUNTY HISTORICAL SOCIETY

Between 1958 and 1970, a distinctivemovement for racial justice emerged fromunique circumstances in Milwaukee. Aseries of local leaders inspired growing num-bers of people to participate in campaignsagainst employment and housing discrimi-nation, segregated public schools, the mem-bership of public officials in discriminatoryorganizations, welfare cuts, and police bru-tality. Patrick Jones tells a powerful and dra-matic story that is important for its insightsinto civil rights history.

“A WELL-RESEARCHED AND FASCINATING NARRATIVE…JONES HAS

PRODUCED AN OUTSTANDING STUDY OF THE CIVIL RIGHTS MOVEMENT

IN MILWAUKEE WHICH SHOULD PROVE A MODEL FOR INVESTIGATIONS

OF OTHER NORTHERN CITIES.”

—RON BRILEY, HISTORY NEWS NETWORK

“SELMA OF THE NORTH IS A SOLID ENTRY INTO THE EXPANDING

BOOKSHELF ON CIVIL RIGHTS ACTIVISM IN THE NORTH, OFFERINGWHAT JONES RIGHTLY CALLS ‘ANOTHER TILE TO THE MOSAIC’ OFSTUDIES ABOUT THE STRUGGLE FOR RACIAL JUSTICE IN THE

TWENTIETH CENTURY.”

—AMANDA I. SELIGMAN, H-NET

“A RIVETING NEW STORY OF THE CIVIL RIGHTS MOVEMENT IN

AMERICA, A TALE ON PAR WITH SELMA, BIRMINGHAM, ANDMONTGOMERY IN ITS POWER AND IMPORTANCE. THIS STORY

TRANSCENDS EASY DICHOTOMIES OF BLACK AND WHITE, NORTH

AND SOUTH, RADICAL AND REFORMIST.”

—TIMOTHY B. TYSON, AUTHOR OF BLOOD DONE SIGN MY NAME

PATR ICK D. JONES is Assistant Professor of History andEthnic Studies, University of Nebraska.

CLOTH: FEBRUARY 2009 / ISBN 978-0-674-03135-7 | SEPTEMBER |6 1⁄8 X 9 1⁄4 | 19 HALFTONES, 1 MAP | 360 PP. |PAPER: ISBN 978-0-674-05729-6 | $22.95X (£16.95 UK) | HISTORY

The Nesting SeasonBernd Heinrich

Belknap 2010 404 pp.Cloth $29.95 / £22.95

ISBN 978-0-674-04877-5

Prefaces to ShakespeareTony Tanner

Belknap 2010 848 pp.Cloth $39.95* / £29.95ISBN 978-0-674-05137-9

The Book That Changed EuropeLynn Hunt, Margaret C. Jacob,

andWijnand MijnhardtBelknap 2010 400 pp.Cloth $32.95 / £24.95

ISBN 978-0-674-04928-4

Habeas CorpusPaul D. Halliday

Belknap 2010 512 pp.Cloth $39.95 / £29.95

ISBN 978-0-674-04901-7

Duel at DawnAmir Alexander

New Histories of Science,Technology, and Medicine

2010 320 pp.Cloth $28.95 / £21.95

ISBN 978-0-674-04661-0

Page 119: Harvard University Press Fall 2010 Catalog

1 1 7

OpiumPierre-Arnaud Chouvy

2010 272 pp.Cloth $27.95 / NA

ISBN 978-0-674-05134-8

A New Literary Historyof America

Edited by Greil MarcusandWerner Sollors

Belknap 2009 1128 pp.Cloth $49.95 / £36.95

ISBN 978-0-674-03594-2

The Last TortoiseCraig B. Stanford

Belknap 2010 240 pp.Cloth $23.95 / £17.95

ISBN 978-0-674-04992-5

We Ain’tWhatWe Ought To BeStephen Tuck

Belknap 2010 528 pp.Cloth $29.95 / £22.95

ISBN 978-0-674-03626-0

Saturday Is for FuneralsUnity Dow and Max Essex

2010 240 pp.Cloth $19.95 / £14.95

ISBN 978-0-674-05077-8

Confederate ReckoningStephanie McCurry

2010 456 pp.Cloth $35.00 / £25.95

ISBN 978-0-674-04589-7

Myths about SuicideThomas Joiner2010 304 pp.

Cloth $25.95 / £19.95ISBN 978-0-674-04822-5

BilingualFrançois Grosjean

2010 304 pp.Cloth $25.95 / £19.95

ISBN 978-0-674-04887-4

An Anthology ofModern Irish PoetryEdited byWes Davis

Belknap 2010 1024 pp.Cloth $35.00 / £21.95

ISBN 978-0-674-04951-2

The Parthenon, Revised EditionMary Beard

Wonders of theWorld2010 204 pp.

Paper $14.95 / NAISBN 978-0-674-05563-6

Pope and DevilHubertWolf

Belknap 2010 336 pp.Cloth $29.95 / £22.95

ISBN 978-0-674-05081-5

Network NationRichard R. John

Belknap 2010 528 pp.Cloth $39.95* / £29.95ISBN 978-0-674-02429-8

Playing the NumbersShaneWhite,

Stephen Garton,Stephen Robertson,and GrahamWhite

2010 320 pp.Cloth $26.95 / £19.95

ISBN 978-0-674-05107-2

The Spirit of the LawSarah Barringer Gordon

Belknap2010 352 pp.

Cloth $29.95 / £22.95ISBN 978-0-674-04654-2

The Crisis ofCapitalist Democracy

Richard A. Posner2010 408 pp.

Cloth $25.95 / £19.95ISBN 978-0-674-05574-2

Page 120: Harvard University Press Fall 2010 Catalog

1 1 8

The Art of the SonnetStephen Burt and David Mikics

Belknap 2010 464 pp.Cloth $35.00 / £25.95

ISBN 978-0-674-04814-0

Setting Downthe Sacred Past

Laurie F. Maffly-KippBelknap 2010 352 pp.Cloth $29.95 / £22.95

ISBN 978-0-674-05079-2

The Shock of the GlobalEdited by Niall Ferguson,

Charles S. Maier, Erez Manela,and Daniel Sargent

Belknap 2010 448 pp.Cloth $29.95 / £22.95

ISBN 978-0-674-04904-8

The Evolution of ChildhoodMelvin Konner

Belknap 2010 960 pp.Cloth $39.95 / £29.95

ISBN 978-0-674-04566-8

A Home ElsewhereRobert B. Stepto

TheW. E. B. Du Bois Lectures2010 192 pp.

Cloth $22.95 / £16.95ISBN 978-0-674-05096-9

Moses MontefioreAbigail Green

Belknap 2010 560 pp.Cloth $35.00 / £24.95

ISBN 978-0-674-04880-5

Selected Poems ofFrederick Goddard Tuckerman

Edited by Ben MazerBelknap 2010 240 pp.Cloth $19.95 / £14.95

ISBN 978-0-674-05048-8

A Swindler’s ProgressKirsten McKenzie2010 368 pp.

Cloth $29.95 / £22.95 OANZISBN 978-0-674-05278-9

The Idea of JusticeAmartya Sen

Belknap 2009 496 pp.Cloth $29.95 / NA

ISBN 978-0-674-03613-0

The Hebrew RepublicEric Nelson

2010 240 pp.Cloth $27.95* / £20.95ISBN 978-0-674-05058-7

The Grand Strategy of theByzantine Empire

Belknap 2009 512 pp.Cloth $35.00 / £25.95

ISBN 978-0-674-03519-5

Prayers of the FaithfulJames P. McCartin

2010 240 pp.Cloth $25.95 / £19.95

ISBN 978-0-674-04913-0

Muhammad and the BelieversFred M. Donner

Belknap 2010 304 pp.Cloth $25.95 / £19.95

ISBN 978-0-674-05097-6

The Thirty YearsWarPeter H.Wilson

Belknap 2009 1040 pp.Cloth $35.00 / USA

ISBN 978-0-674-03634-5

Saving SchoolsPaul E. Peterson

Belknap 2010 336 pp.Cloth $25.95 / £19.95

ISBN 978-0-674-05011-2

Page 121: Harvard University Press Fall 2010 Catalog

‘Dividing the Realm inOrder to Govern’, 85“I have always loved theHolyTongue”, 25Abramson,Minerva’s Owl, 115Ackerman, Decline and Fall of theAmerican…, 11Adams,MyDearest Friend, 97Addiction, 110Advertising Empire, 66Age of Fracture, 12Ali,Marriage and Slavery in Early Islam, 72America’s GeishaAlly, 114AmericanArt at DumbartonOaks, 80Amphitryon.The Comedy of Asses…, 70Ancestral Memory in Early China, 83Anderson, Place in Public, 87Arc of theMoral Universe andOther Essays, 62Arenson, Great Heart of the Republic, 60ArthurMiller, 100Arundel Lyrics.The Poems of Hugh Primas, 45Athenaeus, Learned Banqueters, 71Augustine and Spinoza, 72Austen, Pride and Prejudice, 6Azimi, Quest for Democracy in Iran, 109Baker, 50Most Extreme Places in Our Solar…, 20Bayly, ForgottenWars, 105BeowulfManuscript, 45Berlin-Baghdad Express, 10BeyondTerror andMartyrdom, 105Bigsby,ArthurMiller, 100Bindman, Image of the Black inWesternArt, 18Blanning,Triumph of Music, 102Blatman, DeathMarches, 24Boccaccio, Genealogy of the Pagan Gods, 58Boon, In Praise of Copying, 15Bornstein, Colors of Zion, 38Bossert, Consistency, Choice, and Rationality, 76Bowd,Venice’s Most Loyal City, 65Boyd, On the Origin of Stories, 104Brain Storm, 43Brakke, Gnostics, 69Brands, LatinAmerica’s ColdWar, 50Brashier,Ancestral Memory in Early China, 83Brown, Reaper’s Garden, 114Building Cities, 94C. P.Cavafy: Poems, 92Capitalizing on Crisis, 68Carder,AmericanArt at DumbartonOaks, 80Carder,Home of theHumanities, 80Cavafy, C. P. Cavafy: Poems, 92Charpin, Reading andWriting in Babylon, 40Chen, Poetics of Sovereignty, 84Children of the Revolution, 108ChinaMarchesWest, 113Chu, DoMetaphors Dream of Literal Sleep?, 63Ciarlo,Advertising Empire, 66Classical Tradition, 13Claussen,TheodorW.Adorno, 101Cohen,Arc of theMoral Universe andOther…, 62CollegeAdmissions for the 21st Century, 29Colors of Zion, 38Common Sense, 106Conley, Proceedings of theHarvard Celtic…, 96Consistency, Choice, and Rationality, 76Constitutional Identity, 77Constitutional Theocracy, 77Cooper, Last of theMohicans, 106Copan SculptureMuseum, 89Courtwright,No RightTurn, 30Cranor, Legally Poisoned, 78Crisis of Neoliberalism, 76Cullather,HungryWorld, 48Cultivating Global Citizens, 67Dabashi, Shi’ism, 14Dairy Queens, 64Dante,Vita Nuova, 41Darnton, Poetry and the Police, 21DeathMarches, 24Decline and Fall of theAmerican Republic, 11Democracy’s Prisoner, 108Denecke, Dynamics of Masters Literature, 83Desert Kingdom, 42Destined for Equality, 115

Dialectical Disputations, 59Dickinson, 4Dilemmas and Connections, 37Diversity of Life, 104DoMetaphors Dream of Literal Sleep?, 63Doherty,NewGeographies, 82Doueihi,Augustine and Spinoza, 72Doxiadis, Shackles of Modernity, 93Dreyfus,Wagner and the Erotic Impulse, 52Duménil, Crisis of Neoliberalism, 76Dunbar,HowMany Friends Does One Person…, 22Dunn, Roosevelt’s Purge, 9Dworkin, Justice for Hedgehogs, 1Dynamics of Masters Literature, 83Early Byzantine PilgrimageArt, 79Early Chinese Empires, 109Ecologies of Human Flourishing, 92Eden on the Charles, 32Edgar,Vulgate Bible, 44Edwards, Lab, 23End of Arrogance, 16Epic Rhapsode andHis Craft, 91Evolution of theHumanHead, 36Falconi, Portraits of an Invisible Country, 95Fash, Copan SculptureMuseum, 8950Most Extreme Places in Our Solar System, 20ForgottenWars, 105Foster,Wildlands andWoodlands, 81Freeberg, Democracy’s Prisoner, 108Freidberg, Fresh, 110Fresh, 110Frost, Seeing Stars, 86Fugitive Justice, 31Fulk,BeowulfManuscript, 45Galileo Goes to Jail andOtherMyths…, 98Garland, Peculiar Institution, 2Genealogy of the Pagan Gods, 58Gildea, Children of the Revolution, 108Gnostics, 69God-Fearing and Free, 51Gonzalez, Epic Rhapsode andHis Craft, 91Grafton,“I have always loved theHolyTongue”, 25Grafton, Classical Tradition, 13Great Heart of the Republic, 60GreatWall, 46Greenhalgh, Cultivating Global Citizens, 67Greeson, Our South, 62Group Experiment andOtherWritings, 65Grund,Humanist Tragedies, 59Guernsey, Place of StoneMonuments, 81Hadrian, 100Harcourt, Illusion of FreeMarkets, 57Healing Spaces, 98Heart ofWilliam James, 27Hess, SameThing Over andOver, 54Heyman,Addiction, 110Hirschl, Constitutional Theocracy, 77History of theArab Peoples, 103Hollmann,Master of Signs, 90Home of theHumanities, 80Homelessness,Housing, andMental Illness, 68Horrocks, JohnsonAfterThree Centuries, 95Hourani,History of theArab Peoples, 103HowDemocracyWorks, 94HowMany Friends Does One PersonNeed?, 22How ProfessorsThink, 111HumanDignity, 3Humanist Tragedies, 59HungryWorld, 48Illusion of FreeMarkets, 57Image of the Black inWesternArt, 18In Praise of Copying, 15In the Shadow of Sectarianism, 66Jackson, Destined for Equality, 115Jackson, Life in a Shell, 73Jacobsohn, Constitutional Identity, 77James,Heart ofWilliam James, 27Jazairy,NewGeographies, 82JohnsonAfterThree Centuries, 95Jones, Desert Kingdom, 42Jones, Selma of theNorth, 116

Jordan-Young, Brain Storm, 43JourneyThrough theAfterlife, 33Justice for Hedgehogs, 1Kang, SublimeDreams of LivingMachines, 61Kateb,HumanDignity, 3Kepel, BeyondTerror andMartyrdom, 105Kleanthes andHabrokome, 93Kleinberg, Seven Deadly Sins, 102Kleos in aMinor Key, 90Koller, Restless Plant, 74Krippner, Capitalizing on Crisis, 68Lab, 23Labaree, SomeoneHas to Fail, 55Lamont,How ProfessorsThink, 111Last of theMohicans, 106Last Utopia, 7LatinAmerica’s ColdWar, 50Learned Banqueters, 71Legality, 78Legally Poisoned, 78Levmore, Offensive Internet, 35Lewis, Early Chinese Empires, 109Lieberman, Evolution of theHumanHead, 36Life in a Shell, 73Lubet, Fugitive Justice, 31Luft,Total Cure, 99Macrobius, Saturnalia, 71Maguire, SanMarco, Byzantium, and the…, 79Manifest inWords,Written on Paper, 84Manos, Kleanthes andHabrokome, 93Marriage and Slavery in Early Islam, 72Martin, Dairy Queens, 64Martin, Samuel Johnson, 101Master of Signs, 90Mauch, Sailor Diplomat, 86Maynard’s Revenge, 75McDonough,Arundel Lyrics.The Poems…, 45McGregor, Paris from the GroundUp, 103McMeekin, Berlin-Baghdad Express, 10McNally,What IsMental Illness?, 28Mind in Life, 112Minerva’s Owl, 115Moche of Ancient Peru, 89Moral Dimensions, 113Moreton,To Serve God andWal-Mart, 99Mostern,‘Dividing the Realm inOrder to Govern’, 85Moyn, Last Utopia, 7MyDearest Friend, 97Naive and the Sentimental Novelist, 5Near Andersonville, 47NewGeographies, 82No RightTurn, 30Nugent,Manifest inWords,Written on Paper, 84Numbers, Galileo Goes to Jail andOtherMyths…, 98Nusseibeh,What Is a Palestinian StateWorth?, 8Offensive Internet, 35On the Origin of Stories, 104Opper,Hadrian, 100Our South, 62Paine, Common Sense, 106Pamuk,Naive and the Sentimental Novelist, 5Paris from the GroundUp, 103Peculiar Institution, 2Pellizzi, RES, 88Perdue, ChinaMarchesWest, 113Perlmutter, Promotion andTenure Confidential, 56Petropoulos, Kleos in aMinor Key, 90Pilgrims of theVertical, 26Place in Public, 87Place of StoneMonuments, 81Plato’s Counterfeit Sophists, 91Plautus,Amphitryon.The Comedy of Asses…, 70Poetics of Sovereignty, 84Poetry and the Police, 21Pollock, Group Experiment andOtherWritings, 65Portraits of an Invisible Country, 95Pride and Prejudice, 6Proceedings of theHarvard Celtic Colloquium, 96Promotion andTenure Confidential, 56Quest for Democracy in Iran, 109Quilter,Moche of Ancient Peru, 89

Rana,Two Faces of American Freedom, 39Rawson, Eden on the Charles, 32Reading andWriting in Babylon, 40Reaper’s Garden, 114RES, 88Reshaping theWork-Family Debate, 49Restless Plant, 74Rethinking Juvenile Justice, 111Rodgers,Age of Fracture, 12Rojas, Building Cities, 94Rojas, GreatWall, 46Roosevelt’s Purge, 9Safran,Wandering Soul, 17Sailor Diplomat, 86SameThing Over andOver, 54Samuel Johnson, 101SanMarco, Byzantium, and theMyths of Venice, 79Saturnalia, 71Scanlon,Moral Dimensions, 113Scartascini,HowDemocracyWorks, 94Schutt,Homelessness,Housing, andMental Illness, 68Scott, Rethinking Juvenile Justice, 111Seeing Patients, 34Seeing Stars, 86Selma of theNorth, 116Seven Deadly Sins, 102Shackles of Modernity, 93Shapiro, Legality, 78Shi’ism, 14Shibusawa,America’s GeishaAlly, 114SomeoneHas to Fail, 55Songs of Contentment andTransgression, 85Sound and Script in Chinese Diaspora, 63Sternberg, CollegeAdmissions for the 21st Century, 29Sternberg,Healing Spaces, 98Stevens, God-Fearing and Free, 51Strangers on theWestern Front, 67SublimeDreams of LivingMachines, 61Swearer, Ecologies of Human Flourishing, 92Tan, Songs of Contentment andTransgression, 85Taylor, Dilemmas and Connections, 37Taylor, JourneyThrough theAfterlife, 33Taylor,Maynard’s Revenge, 75Taylor, Pilgrims of theVertical, 26Technology of Empire, 87Tell, Plato’s Counterfeit Sophists, 91TheodorW.Adorno, 101Thompson,Mind in Life, 112Tinkerer’s Accomplice, 112To Serve God andWal-Mart, 99Total Cure, 99Triumph of Music, 102Tsu, Sound and Script in Chinese Diaspora, 63Turner,Tinkerer’s Accomplice, 112Two Faces of American Freedom, 39Valla, Dialectical Disputations, 59Vendler, Dickinson, 4Venice’s Most Loyal City, 65Vikan, Early Byzantine PilgrimageArt, 79Vita Nuova, 41Vulgate Bible, 44Wagner and the Erotic Impulse, 52Wandering Soul, 17Warren,WhatWasAfricanAmerican Literature?, 53Watt,When Empire ComesHome, 88Weber, End of Arrogance, 16Weiss, In the Shadow of Sectarianism, 66What IsMental Illness?, 28WhatWasAfricanAmerican Literature?, 53What Is a Palestinian StateWorth?, 8When Empire ComesHome, 88White, Seeing Patients, 34Wildlands andWoodlands, 81Williams, Reshaping theWork-Family Debate, 49Wilson, Diversity of Life, 104Wood,Near Andersonville, 47Xu, Strangers on theWestern Front, 67Yang,Technology of Empire, 87

w w w . h u p . h a r v a r d . e d u � h a r v a r d u n i v e r s i t y p r e s s 1 1 9

Page 122: Harvard University Press Fall 2010 Catalog

w w w . h u p . h a r v a r d . e d u � h a r v a r d u n i v e r s i t y p r e s s1 2 0

Domestic orders/inquiries

Customer Service, HarvardUniversity Press, c/oTriliteral-LLC,100Maple RidgeDrive, Cumberland, RI 02864-1769

Phone: USA&Canada, 1-800-405-1619; all others, (401) 531-2800

Fax: USA&Canada, 1-800-406-9145; all others, (401) 531-2801

Email orders to: [email protected] inquiries to: [email protected]

Harvard is amember of PUBNET. SAN: 631-8126Individuals are urged to order through abookseller.

Booksellersmayorder all titles at regular discounts and terms that are published intheABAhandbook. A discount schedulemaybe obtained from the SalesDepartmentat (617) 495-2606.

Bookseller discount codes: Trade discount books: nomark;academic trade books: *, will be discounted at 40% to all retail andwholesalecustomers; text discount books: x, will be discounted at 20% for all retailersexcept agency planmembers.

Book revieweditors: Fax requests for review copies to the Publicity Departmentat (617) 495-4051 or send requests by email to: [email protected].

Examcopy requestsmust be submitted ondepartmental letterhead to theCustomer ServiceDepartment. Requestsmay be faxed to 1-800-406-9145 or(401) 531-2801 and should include course title and estimated enrollment.

Libraries are urged to order through awholesaler.Theymay also order directly andmay chooseHarvard’s StandingOrder Plan.

Terms:Net 30 days.

Claims:Customer claims involving short shipment or non-deliverymust becommunicated to Customer Servicewithin 60 days of invoice date.

Returns:Booksmust be in resaleable condition. Nopermission required, but invoiceinformationmust be provided or a penalty discountwill be used. No returns acceptedafter 18months.

Sendbooks prepaid, carefully packed, andmarked“Returns”to:HarvardUniversity Press, Returns, c/oTriliteral-LLC,100Maple RidgeDr., Cumberland, RI 02864-1769.

Canadian customers can send returns to:HarvardUniversity Press, c/oGeorgetownBookWarehouse,34ArmstrongAve., Georgetown,Ontario L7G 4R9, Canada.

Area sales restrictionsNA For sale inNorthAmerica onlyCOBE Not for sale inUnited KingdomandCommonwealth

(except Canada)COBEE Not for sale inUnited Kingdom, Commonwealth, and Europe

(except Canada)OANZ Not for sale in Australia andNewZealandOBE World rights except United KingdomandCommonwealthOBEEI World rights except United Kingdom, Commonwealth,

Europe, and IsraelOISC Not for sale in Indian subcontinentOLACAR Not for sale in Latin America or the CaribbeanOMEIPSAA Not for sale inMiddle East, Indian Subcontinent, SouthAsia,

Southeast Asia, or AustraliaUSA For sale in theUnited States and its dependencies only

All prices anddiscounts are subject to changewithout notice.

In Canada, HarvardUniversity Press booksare sold directly at U.S. discounts. For all territo-ries not covered by the EuropeanOffice, below,excludingAustralia andNewZealand, ordersshould be sent to:

Customer ServiceHarvardUniversity Pressc/oTriliteral-LLC100Maple RidgeDriveCumberland, RI 02864-1769

SALES REPRESENTATION

SusanDonnelly, Director of SalesHarvardUniversity Press79Garden St.Cambridge,MA02138TEL: 617-495-2606 FAX: [email protected]

Internet Sales andElectronicData:Ms.VanessaVinarubAssistant Sales Director andElectronic InformationManagerTEL: 617-495-2650 FAX: [email protected]

InNewYorkCity andSpecial Sales:Ms. Briana RossTEL: 617-384-7515 FAX: [email protected]

In theMidwest andPacificNorthwest:Mr. John EklundTEL: 414-963-4372 FAX: [email protected]

In the Southwest andCA:Ms. Patricia NelsonTEL: 505-466-1327 FAX: [email protected]

In theNortheast andMid-Atlantic:Ms. Adena SiegelTEL: 860-491-9047 FAX: [email protected]

InNC, SC,TN,VA,WV:Mr.WayneDonnellGeorge Scheer AssociatesTEL: 1-800-265-8504 FAX: [email protected]

InAL, FL, GA,MS, :Mr.TomMurphyGeorge Scheer AssociatesTEL: 404-378-8527 FAX: [email protected]

InAR, LA,OK,TX:Ms. Elaine RathgeberGeorge Scheer AssociatesTEL: 512-336-3867 FAX: [email protected]

In Canada:Mr. David StimpsonUniversity Press Group164Hillsdale Ave. EastToronto, OntarioM4S 1T5CanadaTEL: 416-484-8296 FAX: [email protected]

In Central America:Ms. Cynthia ZimpferZimpfer Books Latin AmericaCuernavaca,Morelos,MexicoTEL& FAX: [email protected]

In theCaribbean:Ms. Cynthia ZimpferZimpfer Books CaribbeanUSATEL& FAX: [email protected]

In China:Ms.Wei ZhaoEverest International Publishing Services2-1-503UHN InternationalBeijing 100028, ChinaTEL: 86-10-5130-1051 FAX: [email protected]

InHongKong:Ms. Jane LamAromix Books Company Ltd.Unit 7, 8/F, Blk BHoi Luen Industrial Ctr.No 55, HoiYuen Rd., KwunTongKowloon, HongKongTEL: 852-2749-1288 FAX: [email protected]

In Israel:Mr. Rodney FranklinRodney Franklin AgencyP.O.B. 37727,Tel Aviv 61376, IsraelTEL: +972-3-5600-724FAX: [email protected]

In Japan:Mr. Gilles FauveauRockbook Inc.2-3-25, 9 Fl., KudanminamiChiyoda-KuTokyo, 102-0074, JapanTEL: +81-3-3264-0144 FAX: [email protected]

In SouthKorea:Mr. Se-Yung Jun&Ms.Min-HwaYooInformation&Culture Korea473-19 Seokyo-dong,Mapo-kuSeoul, Korea 121-842TEL: 82-2-3141-4791 FAX: [email protected]

Sales representation anddistribution

UNITED STATES OFFICE

Page 123: Harvard University Press Fall 2010 Catalog

In Southeast Asia:

In Singapore:Mr. Phillip AngChoiceTEXTS (Asia) Pte Ltd7 KampongBahru RoadSingapore 169342TEL: +65 6324 3616 FAX: +65 6324 [email protected]

InMalaysia&Brunei:Mr. SimonTayApex Knowledge SdnBhd12 Jalan Pemberita U1/49Temasya Industrial Park, Glenmarie SeksyenU140150 ShahAlam, SelangorMalaysiaTEL: +603-5569 1696 FAX: +603-5569 [email protected]

In Philippines:Ms. Jean LimMegaTEXTS Phil., Inc.Room503, OneCorporate Plaza Condominium845Amaiz RoadSan LorenzoVillage, 1200Makati CityPhilippinesTEL: +63-2-813 5814 FAX: +63-2-840 [email protected]

InThailand:Ms. Suphaluck SattabuzBooknet Co., Ltd.8 Krungthep Krethat 8Yaek 8Huamark BangkapiBangkok 10240,ThailandTEL: 66 (0)2 769 3888 FAX: 66 (0)2 379 [email protected]

InTaiwan:B.K. Norton,Ms.Meihua Sun5F, 60, Roosevelt Rd. Sec. 4Taipei 100TaiwanTEL: +886-2-6632-0088FAX: [email protected]

SALES REPRESENTATION &EXCLUSIVE DISTRIBUTION

InAustralia&NZ:Inbooks – c/o James Bennett Pty. Ltd.Ms. Alexa Burnell, 3 NarabangWayBelroseNSW2085AustraliaTEL: +61-2-9986-7037 FAX: [email protected]

SALES DISTRIBUTION (NONEXCLUSIVE)

In Japan:United Publishers Services1-32-5Higashi ShinagawaShiagawa-Ku,Tokyo 140-0002 JapanTEL: 03-5479-7251 FAX: 03-5479-7303

InMalaysia:YUHAAssociatesMr. AhmadZahar KamaruddinNo. 17, Jalan Bola Jaring,13/15, Seksyen 13, 40000 ShahAlamSelangorDarul Ehsan,MalaysiaTEL: 03-5511 9799 FAX: 03-5519 [email protected]

TheUnited Kingdom, Continental Europe, Eire,theMiddle East, Africa, India, and Pakistan:

Information and catalogues:HarvardUniversity PressFitzroyHouse,11 Chenies Street, LondonWC1E 7EY EnglandTEL: +44-(0)207-306-0603FAX: +44-(0)[email protected]

Orders:HarvardUniversity Pressc/o JohnWiley & Sons Ltd.Southern CrossTrading Estate1OldlandsWayBognor Regis,W. SussexPO22 9SA, EnglandTEL: +44-(0)1243-779777FAX: +44-(0)1243 [email protected]

� Europeanpublicationwill be onemonth later than the date given inthe catalog.

�Please note area sales restrictionsoutlined onpage 108.

�Discount codes donot apply to theterritories listed at right.

�VATmaybe charged in EC countriesat the appropriate national rate.

�Customers should include theirVAT registration number/exemptiondetails with order.

�Billing in Euros is possiblewithin theEuro Zone.

�Contact JohnWiley at the addressabove formore details.

SALES REPRESENTATION

In France, Benelux, & Scandinavia:Academic Book PromotionsAttn: FredHermansHoofdstraat 2611611AGBovenkarspelTheNetherlandsTEL: +31-(0) 228-516664FAX: +31-(0) [email protected]

InGermany, Austria,Switzerland, & Italy:Uwe LüdemannSchleiermacherstr. 8D-10961 Berlin, GermanyTEL: +49-30-69508189FAX: [email protected]

In Pakistan:SaleemMalikWorld Press27/A, Al-Firdous Ave.Faiz RoadMuslimTownLahore, 54600, PakistanTEL: [email protected]

In Poland,Hungary, Slovenia,theCzechRepublic, Slovakia,Croatia, Russia, Lithuania, Latvia,Estonia, Romania, Serbia, Albania,&Bosnia&Herzegovina:Ewa LedochowiczPOBox 805-520 Konstancin-JeziornaPolandTEL: + 4822 754 1764 FAX: + 4822 756 [email protected]

In SouthernAfrica:CoryVoigt, PalgravePrivate BagX19Northlands (Johannesburg)2116 SouthAfricaTEL: +27 11 731 3300 FAX: +27 11 731 [email protected]

In Spain&Portugal:Christopher HumphrysCalleTeodoro deMolina 9Apartado 8329480Gaucin,MalagaSpainTEL: (+34) 952-151462 FAX: (+34) [email protected]

SALES DISTRIBUTION (NONEXCLUSIVE)

InAfrica (includingCameroon,Ethiopia, Gambia, Ghana, Kenya,Malawi,Mauritius, Nigeria, Rwanda,Tanzania, Uganda, &Zambia):TonyMoggach (IMA)14York RiseLondonNW51ST, EnglandTEL: +44 (0) 207 267 8054FAX: +44 (0) 207 485 [email protected]

In India:Mediamatics59/10, Prince Bakhtiar Shah RoadKolkata – 700 033, IndiaTEL: 033 32009632/32957955FAX: 033 [email protected]

In Iran:Mr. FarhadMaftoonJahanAdib Publishing1st Floor, No 12, Behesht-AaeenAlleyDavazdah-e-Farvardin St.EnghelabAve., Tehran 13149-63951 IranTEL: +98 (0)21- 6696 9111 - 6697 1329 - 66412126& 7TEL/FAX: +98 (0) 21 66971329Cell: +98 (0) 912 114 [email protected]

In Cyprus, Jordan,Malta,Morocco,Tunisia, &Turkey:Claire deGruchyAvicenna Partnership Ltd.POBox 484OxfordOX2 9WQ, EnglandTEL: +44 (0) 7771 [email protected]

In Bahrain, Egypt, Iraq, Kuwait,Lebanon, Libya,Oman,Qatar,Saudi Arabia, Syria,Sudan,UAE, &Yemen:Bill KennedyAvicenna Partnership Ltd.POBox 484OxfordOX2 9WQ, EnglandTEL: +44 (0) 7802 244457FAX: +44 (0) 1387 [email protected]

EUROPEAN OFFICE

Page 124: Harvard University Press Fall 2010 Catalog

harvard university press79 garden street 3 cambridge ma 02138

www.hup.harvard.edu

N O N -P R O F I T O R G .U.S. P O S TA G E

PAIDB O S T O N , MAP E R M I T N O.

2709